2) General Manual LRP210

805-661.
210
LRPLinear Rod Pump Software
LRP General Manual
Notices
Copyright 2009 Unico, Inc.
All Rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or reduced to any
electronic media or machine-readable format without the prior written permission of Unico, Inc.
At the time of printing, features of the product described herein are protected by United States
Patent Number 7,168,924. Other patents are pending.
The information contained in the manual is considered accurate to the best knowledge of the
supplier at the time of publication. The manufacturer assumes no liability for errors that may exist.
The supplier reserves the right to change data and specifications without notice.
All trade designations are provided without reference to the rights of their respective owners.
Printed in the United States of America
Unico LRP General Manual
General Information
4 November 2009
Table of Contents
Safety Information............................................................................................................. 7
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Overview ...........................................................................................................................................7
Conventions Used .............................................................................................................................7
Attention Symbol Definition ...............................................................................................................7
General Precautions..........................................................................................................................7
Service Precautions...........................................................................................................................7
Application Precautions .....................................................................................................................8
Safe Service Practices ......................................................................................................................9
About the Manual ............................................................................................................ 10
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
Overview .........................................................................................................................................10
Contents ..........................................................................................................................................10
What is covered...............................................................................................................................10
What is not covered.........................................................................................................................10
Intended Audience...........................................................................................................................10
Application Overview ..................................................................................................... 12
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.1.1
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
Overview .........................................................................................................................................12
Hardware Requirements..................................................................................................................13
Drive Models....................................................................................................................................13
Control Modules ..............................................................................................................................13
Optional Modules.............................................................................................................................13
Operator Interface ...........................................................................................................................13
Application Description ....................................................................................................................13
Application Interface ........................................................................................................................13
UEdit Software ..............................................................................................................................14
Application Features........................................................................................................................14
Sensor-Free Control ........................................................................................................................14
Dynamometer, Torque, Speed and IPR Graphs..............................................................................14
Auto-Identification Routines.............................................................................................................14
System Monitors..............................................................................................................................14
System Data Collection ...................................................................................................................15
System Data Output ........................................................................................................................15
Daily Gauging ..................................................................................................................................15
Operational Modes ..........................................................................................................................15
System Controllers ..........................................................................................................................16
Application Wiring .......................................................................................................... 17
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.1.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
Overview .........................................................................................................................................17
Wiring Standards and Codes...........................................................................................................17
Wiring Precautions ..........................................................................................................................17
100MHz Control Module Terminal Block Location...........................................................................18
Compact 100MHz Control Module Terminal Block Location ...........................................................18
Control Module Serial Input Connection Descriptions .....................................................................19
Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistors .................................................................................19
Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistor Location ....................................................................19
RJ-45 Connector Pin-Outs ..............................................................................................................20
Console PortAsynchronous Serial Interface.................................................................................20
Console Port Serial Connections at the Terminal Block ..................................................................20
Port AAuxiliary Asynchronous Serial Interface #1........................................................................20
Port BAuxiliary Asynchronous Serial Interface #2........................................................................20
Digital Input and Output Connections TB1 (Discrete
Parallel I/O) ..............................................21
Digital Output Connection TB1 (Discrete Parallel Outputs) .............................................................21
Digital Input Connections TB1 (Discrete Parallel Inputs) .................................................................21
Analog Input and Output Connections TB2 .....................................................................................21
4-20 mA Analog Input Load Resistors .............................................................................................22
4-20 mA Analog Input Load Resistors Location...............................................................................22
Analog Input Connections TB2 ........................................................................................................22
DC Power Supplies TB2..................................................................................................................22
General Information
4 November 2009
Table of Contents
4.4.4
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
Analog Output Connection TB2 .......................................................................................................22

Analog Interface Module..................................................................................................................23
Typical Analog Input Wiring .............................................................................................................23
Typical Analog Output Wiring ..........................................................................................................23
Analog Interface Module Connections.............................................................................................23
Operator Interface ........................................................................................................... 25
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.5.1
5.3.5.2
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
5.3.8.1
5.3.8.1.1
5.3.8.1.2
5.3.8.1.3
5.3.8.1.4
5.3.8.2
5.3.8.3
5.3.8.3.1
5.3.8.4
5.3.8.4.1
5.3.8.4.2
5.3.8.4.3
5.3.8.4.4
5.3.8.5
5.3.8.5.1
5.3.8.5.2
5.3.8.5.3
5.3.8.5.4
5.3.8.5.5
5.3.8.5.6
5.3.8.5.7
5.3.8.5.8
5.3.8.5.9
5.3.8.5.10
5.3.8.5.11
5.3.8.6
5.3.8.6.1
5.3.8.6.2
5.3.8.6.3
5.3.8.6.4
5.3.8.6.5
5.3.8.6.6
5.3.8.6.7
5.3.8.6.8
5.3.8.6.9
5.3.8.6.10
5.3.8.6.11
5.3.8.6.12
5.3.8.6.13
5.3.8.6.14
Overview .........................................................................................................................................25
LCD Display and Keypad ................................................................................................................25
GLCD Display and Keypad..............................................................................................................25
Basic Keypad Key Functions ...........................................................................................................26
Menu Navigation..............................................................................................................................26
LCD Display.....................................................................................................................................27
GLCD Display..................................................................................................................................28
Screen Power Saver........................................................................................................................28
Power-Up Display............................................................................................................................28
SRP Main Displays..........................................................................................................................28
LCD Main Displays ..........................................................................................................................29
GLCD Main Displays .......................................................................................................................29
Bar-graph Display............................................................................................................................29
Fault Display....................................................................................................................................29
Setup Menu .....................................................................................................................................29
Dictionary ........................................................................................................................................29
Dictionary Setup Parameters...........................................................................................................29
Editing Numeric Parameters............................................................................................................30
Editing Hexadecimal Numeric Parameters ......................................................................................30
Editing Enumerated Parameters......................................................................................................30
Drive Test ........................................................................................................................................30
AC Test ...........................................................................................................................................30
Un-coupled AC Test ........................................................................................................................30
Faults Menu.....................................................................................................................................30
Fault, Warning and Event Mask Displays ........................................................................................31
Editing the Mask ..............................................................................................................................31
Fault and Warning History Display ..................................................................................................31
Event History Display ......................................................................................................................31
Archive Menu...................................................................................................................................32
Serial Connections ..........................................................................................................................32
The Archive File...............................................................................................................................32
Data Upload.....................................................................................................................................32
Data Download ................................................................................................................................33
Data Default.....................................................................................................................................33
Data Recall ......................................................................................................................................33
Data Store .......................................................................................................................................33
Data Erase.......................................................................................................................................34
Data Status......................................................................................................................................34
Reset ID ..........................................................................................................................................34
Upload WPR....................................................................................................................................34
Help Display ....................................................................................................................................35
Feedback.........................................................................................................................................35
Analog .............................................................................................................................................35
PIO ..................................................................................................................................................35
Clock ...............................................................................................................................................35
Process ...........................................................................................................................................35
Calendar ..........................................................................................................................................36
Controller .........................................................................................................................................36
SSI...................................................................................................................................................36
Mem ................................................................................................................................................36
Global Dictionary .............................................................................................................................36
Network Map ...................................................................................................................................36
NVMEM ...........................................................................................................................................36
Ports ................................................................................................................................................36
UEdit Utility ...................................................................................................................................37
General Information
4 November 2009
Table of Contents
5.3.8.6.15
5.3.8.7
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.1.1
5.4.1.2
5.4.1.3
5.4.1.4
5.4.1.5
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
5.4.2.2
System Errors..................................................................................................................................37
Chart Display (Requires GLCD) ......................................................................................................37
Password Protection........................................................................................................................37
Password Selection .........................................................................................................................38
Global Parameter: level 1 password...............................................................................................38
Global Parameter: lockout time ......................................................................................................38
Global Parameter: lockout status....................................................................................................38
Dictionary Access Levels.................................................................................................................38
Menu Item Access Levels................................................................................................................38
Menu Item Access Levels................................................................................................................38
Application Dictionary Menus ....................................................................................... 39
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.2.1
6.1.2.2
6.1.2.3
6.1.2.4
6.1.2.5
6.1.2.6
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23
6.24
6.25
6.26
6.27
6.28
6.29
6.30
6.31
Overview .........................................................................................................................................39
Parameter Visibility Control .............................................................................................................39
Parameter Unit Selection.................................................................................................................39
Keypad Units ...................................................................................................................................39
UEdit Software Units.....................................................................................................................39
Console Units ..................................................................................................................................39
Port A Units .....................................................................................................................................39
Port B Units .....................................................................................................................................39
User Definable Units........................................................................................................................39
Operator Menu ................................................................................................................................40
Gauge Menu....................................................................................................................................44
Valve Check Menu ..........................................................................................................................46
Maintenance Menu ..........................................................................................................................48
Feature List Menu............................................................................................................................49
Pump Speed Menu..........................................................................................................................50
Pump Fill Menu................................................................................................................................53
Optimizer Menu ...............................................................................................................................55
Gearbox Menu.................................................................................................................................59
Pumping Unit Menu .........................................................................................................................61
Rod/Pump Menu..............................................................................................................................67
Reservoir Menu ...............................................................................................................................73
Well ID Menu ...................................................................................................................................74
DynaCard Menu ..............................................................................................................................77
Control Menu ...................................................................................................................................81
Power Menu ....................................................................................................................................82
Generator Menu ..............................................................................................................................85
Calendar Menu ................................................................................................................................88
EOP Enhanced Oil Production Controller Menu ..........................................................................90
Fault/Event Menu ............................................................................................................................95
Motor Menu ................................................................................................................................... 101
Drive Menu .................................................................................................................................... 103
Drive Reg Menu............................................................................................................................. 106
Signals In Menu............................................................................................................................. 111
Signals Out Menu .......................................................................................................................... 134
Digital I/O Menu (Discrete Parallel I/O).......................................................................................... 139
Display Menu................................................................................................................................. 143
Comm Menu .................................................................................................................................. 146
Quickstart Menu ............................................................................................................................ 152
Simulate Menu............................................................................................................................... 158
System Startup.............................................................................................................. 163
7.1
7.2
7.3
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 163

AC Test ......................................................................................................................................... 163
Application Start-Up....................................................................................................................... 163
Faults, Warnings and Events....................................................................................... 164
General Information
4 November 2009
Table of Contents
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 164

Fault System.................................................................................................................................. 164
History ...........................................................................................................................................164
Fault Masks ...................................................................................................................................165
Hardware Faults ............................................................................................................................166
Software Faults..............................................................................................................................168
Application Faults ..........................................................................................................................171
User Faults ....................................................................................................................................173
Index............................................................................................................................... 177
General Information
4 November 2009
Safety Information
1.1
Overview
This section states important safety information that must be followed when setting up, operating
and troubleshooting the application. Study this information carefully before working with the
equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may lead to personal injury, death, or damage to the
equipment.
1.2
Conventions Used
The following notation convention is used throughout this manual to indicate information important
to personal safety or machine hazards.
1.2.1
Attention Symbol Definition

!
1.3
1.4
Attention
This symbol identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to
personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss.
General Precautions
!
Attention
Only qualified personnel with the proper skills, instruction and familiarity with the
machinery, drive, driven equipment and its applications (hereinafter referred to the
system) should install, start-up, operate, troubleshoot, and maintain the drive. Such
personnel must be familiar with the electrical and mechanical components of the system
to perform the procedures outlined in this manual and its companion documents,
including, but not limited to, the Drive Guide to Installation, Troubleshooting and
Maintenance, Quick Start Guide, and the Exhaustive Startup Checklist. Failure to comply
may result in personal injury, death and/or system equipment damage.
Attention
Failure to take proper precautions for electrical hazard could cause injury or death.
Attention
Failure to follow instructions in this document and industry safety standards could damage
the drive and void the manufacturers warranty.
Service Precautions
!
Attention
Always disconnect and lock out all electrical supplies before working on the drive or
associated system equipment. Do this before touching any electrical or mechanical
components associated with the system.
Attention
Always ensure that mechanical energy sources are locked out before working on the drive
or associated system equipment. Do this before touching any electrical or mechanical
components associated with the system.
General Information
Safety Information
7
1.5
Attention
High voltage may be present even when all electrical power supplies are disconnected.
After switching off electrical power, wait at least fifteen minutes for bus circuit capacitors to
discharge stored electrical energy before working on the drive or associated equipment.
Use an appropriate voltmeter to further verify that the capacitors have fully discharged
before beginning work. Do not rely exclusively on the bus voltage indicator. Dangerous
voltage levels may remain even when the indicator is off.
Attention
High voltage may be present at the motor output terminals whenever input power is
applied or bus voltage is present whether the motor is moving or not.
Attention
If an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is the drive fails from a build-up of internal pressure,
the case of the capacitor may rupture or the safety vent will operate spraying electrolyte
liquid and/or vapor from the capacitor. If a capacitor ruptures or vent:
Avoid contact with the liquid
Avoid inhaling the vapors and ventilate the area
If your skin comes in contact with the electrolyte, flush it immediately with cold
water
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, immediately remove any contact lenses and flush
the open eyes with plenty of clean water
If electrolyte is ingested, dilute it by drinking warm water and seek immediate

medical attention
Attention
Before energizing the motor, verify that there are no loose components associated with
the drive or drive train and that the motor motion will not result in injury or death to
persons or damage to the system equipment.
Attention
The drive may be sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Static precautions are required
when servicing or repairing the unit.
Application Precautions
!
Attention
An incorrectly installed or operated drive can result in damage to the equipment it controls.
Make certain installation and operating specifications are followed.
Attention
Emergency stop devices shall be located at each operator control station and at other
operating stations where emergency stop may be required. Control inputs do not
generate an emergency stop of the motor and do not remove power that can cause
hazardous conditions. Regardless of the operating state, the drives motor output
terminals may be at dangerous voltage levels whenever input power is applied or the bus
is charged.
General Information
Safety Information
8
1.6
Attention
When serial communications connections are made to the drive, the operation of the
drive, motor and system equipment may be started, changed and/or stopped at any time
in response to the commands received by the drive from a remote serial device. When
such serially commanded operation could cause personal injury or death or damage to the
system equipment, personnel on site shall remove serial connections to the drive to
prevent receipt of serially generated operational commands.
Attention
The drive is may start automatically when power is applied or after a fault trip if the autorestart functionality has been enabled. The auto-restart functionality must not be enabled
when hazardous conditions might arise from such action.
Attention
Upon removing power or removing the run (auto) input, the unit will continue to move until
it is parked.
Safe Service Practices
Follow industry-recognized safety practices, including, but not limited to:
Use only one hand to hold test equipment probes
Wear approved eye, foot, ear, leg, arm, face, hair, and head protection
Stand on insulated material
Use an isolated oscilloscope
Keep unnecessary personnel out of the work area
Never leave a drive enclosure open or unattended
Never run with scissors
General Information
Safety Information
9
2
2.1
About the Manual

Overview
This section describes the contents and intended audience of this document.
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Contents
What is covered
Safety Information.
Application Overview.
Application Wiring, describes input and output connections specific to the application. For
more information refer to the Drive Guide to Installation, Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
Operator Interface, describes how to use the keypad and operator display to navigate the
menus and operate the drive.
Parameter descriptions on a menu-by-menu basis.
Digital, analog, and serial I/O descriptions.
Introduction to the System . For better detail, refer to the LRP Quick Start Guide and LRP
Exhaustive Startup Checklist.
Faults, Warnings and Events.
What is not covered

This manual does not address basic hardware and firmware aspects of the drive that are covered
in the Drive Guide to Installation, Troubleshooting and Maintenance and firmware instruction
manuals. Please refer to other documents for:
2.3
Receiving and unpacking instructions
Hardware features and specifications
Mechanical installation instructions
Electrical installation instructions
Drive troubleshooting, maintenance and spare parts
Detailed listing of basic drive parameters
Drive Setup and auto-tuning procedures
Application setup and auto-tuning procedures
Interface setup and diagnostic utilities
Intended Audience
The manual is intended for anyone who will be installing, operating and servicing the drive and
system equipment. Installation should be performed by qualified electrical personnel to ensure that
correct electrical practices and applicable electrical codes are applied. Start-up and operation
should be performed by personnel familiar with both the drive and the machinery or equipment
controls or is controlled by.
The audience is expected to have a basic knowledge of physical and electrical fundamentals,
electrical wiring practices and components and electrical schematics.
General Information
About the Manual
10
Attention
Follow Instructions.
Personal injury or damage to the drive or system equipment can be prevented by carefully
following the procedure outlined in the documents.
Attention
Follow Regulations.
All electrical work should conform to the National Electrical Code as well as all state and
local government regulations. Please familiarize yourself with these regulations.
Attention
Read all documents first.
Read this manual as well as the Drive Guide to Installation, Troubleshooting, firmware
instruction manuals, Maintenance, Quick Start Guide and Exhaustive Startup Checklist
entirely before installing, operating or servicing the drive and/or system equipment. Failure
to read all of the manuals could result in injury, death, or worse.
General Information
About the Manual
11
3
3.1
Application Overview
Overview
This section provides an overview of the Artificial LiftLRP Linear Rod Pump Application. It
identifies its hardware requirements and briefly describes its features.
The LRP linear rod pump is a rack-and-pinion actuator that reciprocates a sucker rod pump via the
forward and reverse action of a positioning servo motor, shown below.
General Information
12
3.2
Hardware Requirements
The LRP Application is compatible with the following drive models and hardware.
3.2.1
Drive Models
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
1100/1105/1110/1130/1140/1200
Control Modules
100 MHz (X10PN 323-546, 323-547, 323-397)
Compact 100 MHz (X10PN 323-656, 323-060, 323-667)
Optional Modules
Analog Interface 8 Inputs, 4 Outputs Module (PN 321-557)
Mass Data Storage Memory Module (SD-RAM) Expansion Module (PN 323-863, 712-333,
925-930)
MaxStream 900 MHz RF Wireless Module (PN 924-185)
MaxStream 2.4 GHz RF Wireless Module (PN 924-186)
Bluetooth Communication Module (PN 712-334, 713-335)
Operator Interface
16-key keypad 2x24 line Display Screen (PN 203-046)
16-key keypad 16x40 line Graphic Screen (PN 203-181)
Application Description
The drive and associated application are used to control LRP linear rod pump. See Quick Start
Guide for detailed description for starting up the system.
3.3.1
Application Interface
Several interface devices are supported by the application. These include direct input at the drive
enclosure, serial input via hard-wire connection, serial input via RF Modem, and serial input via
Bluetooth connectivity.
16-key keypad and operator display.
Menu dictionary items (parameters) have controlled visibility which hides those parameters
which are not in use to simplify Menu usage and navigation.
An embedded parameter troubleshooter to assist in avoiding parameter entry errors.
Imperial or Metric parameter unit display.
User selectable volume, flow and pressure units.
A screen-saver feature that turns off the display when unused for power economy.
A four-parameter user definable main screen display area.
Software for Windows PC. This software is included with the application purchase.
Software for Palm OS handheld devices. This software is included with the application
purchase.
General Information
13
3.3.1.1
UEdit Software
UEdit is a suite of tools that run on a PC using Windows XP, or 2000. These tools can be used to
configure and modify existing embedded drive programs. They can also be used to monitor,
simulate, and provide diagnostic information from the drive in real time.
3.4
3.4.1
The application project, UDT (*.udt) File, may be used to serially set and/or monitor parameter
values in the dictionary Menus, Fault, Warning and Event Histories, Analog I/O, Digital I/O.
The chart recorder tool allows the user to sample data and display it in a several graphical
formats, Y(t), X-Y, and Polar. The chart recorder configuration and recorded data, if any, can
be saved as UCR (*.ucr) files.
The data sampler may used to sample signals in the drive in real time. The data can then be
stored to a file on a mass storage device, or recorded during viewing of the sampler on the PC.
Multiple samplers can be configured to run on a single schedule that can be setup to trigger
from signal conditions. The data sampler configuration can be saved as UDM (*.udm) files.
The data sampler recorded data, is be saved as UDH (*.udh) files.
The system monitor may be used monitor multiple signals for multiple drives in real time. The
data can then be stored to a file on a mass storage device, or recorded during viewing of the
sampler on the PC. Multiple samplers can be configured to run on a single schedule that can
be setup to trigger from signal conditions. The system monitor configuration can be saved as
USM (*.usm) files.
Application Features
Sensor-Free Control
This application controls the pumping system without the need for external rod-load and
rod-position sensors. This is achieved through the use of embedded pumping unit,
counterbalance, rod-string, tubing, casing, down-hole-pump and reservoir models. A full system
and reservoir simulation mode is included.
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
Dynamometer, Torque, Speed and IPR Graphs
Actual surface and down-hole pump DynaCard generator from measured data.
Predictive surface and down-hole pump DynaCard generator from model data.
Actual torque, as-balanced torque, and counterweight imbalance torque graphs.
Crank speed, polished rod speed, and downhole pump speed graphs.
A graph of the latest automatic Valve Check test.
IPR Curve graph allows the user to visually identify the theoretical well inflow performance
relationship (IPR) at the pump, and the current pumping point.
Auto-Identification Routines
An on-demand well identification routine self-identifies the pumping units individual operating
conditions including pump counterbalance.
A valve check routine determines fluid losses due to the traveling and standing valves. This
routine may be performed on-demand and/or automatically once per day.
An automatic pump-fill trigger level detector continuously determines the appropriate fluid load
used for pump fill measurement during changing operating conditions.
System Monitors
A pump fill monitor continuously measures and displays the pump fill as a percentage of the
net down-hole pump stroke.
A pump flow monitor provides a continuous estimate of pump flow without the need for
additional instrumentation.
General Information
14
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
A counter-balance monitor displays the system imbalance to assist in the selection of

counterweight force to minimize gearbox stress and energy consumption.
A gearbox torque monitor.
A rod weight calculator that uses rod type and dimensions to compute fluid and rod weights.
A rod position monitor that provides continuous display of polished rod position.
A rod load monitor that provides continuous display of polished rod load.
A pump position monitor that provides continuous display of down-hole pump position.
A pump load monitor that provides continuous display of the weight of fluid being lifted by the
down-hole pump.
Input, regenerative, output, motor, rod and lift power monitors.
Energy efficiency monitors.
System maintenance reminders for gearbox lube, rack lube, and stuffing box.
System Data Collection
A Well Production Report Generator which produces a fully synchronized well production
report. This report includes both graphical and tabular data that indicates the current
performance of the well.
Time-stamped event and fault logging.
Time-stamped parameter user-definable Data Sampler with optional Mass Data Storage
Module.
Optional multi-channel analog input data logging.
Production and power meters.
Daily gauging.
User selectable digital (discrete parallel) outputs.
System Data Output
User selectable digital (discrete parallel) outputs. Provides for notification of motor status, fault
status, maintenance required and service callouts.
Optional multi-channel analog output data.
Compatibility with Case Lowis and CSLift Beam Application.
Compatibility with Theta Systems.
Daily Gauging
Fluid, oil and water production.
Losses in production due to leakage.
Number of pump strokes
Average pump fill and pump strokes per minute (spm).
Number of pump-off controller stop incidents.
Fluid flow rate.
Power usage.
Energy consumption.
Operational Modes
A pump speed selector provides for independent upstroke and downstroke speeds from
external potentiometers, internal preset parameters or serial communication channels.
An Auto-Restarts mode that allows restarting operation from power-loss or faults.
Calendar Controller for time of use programmability
Timer Mode Controller for simple on/off timer programmability
General Information
15
3.4.9
Hand Mode
System Controllers
A pump optimization mode controls pumping speed to regulate pump fill. The optimizers softlanding feature helps to protect the down-hole pump by reducing speed until the pump is in
the fluid.
A shut-off controller provides automatic pump shut-off with automatic variable dwell time for
wells with low inflow characteristics.
A sensor-free Rod Float Controller can prevent rod float by automatically adjusting the speed.
If rod float occurs, this automatic speed reduction reduces violent re-connection between the
polished rod and rack.
A User SPM Adjust feature that provides automatic pump speed adjustment in response to
input from an external sensor such as temperature or pressure.
A Calendar Control controls power usage by limiting operation by time of day, weekday or
weekend and month.
A Timer Controller provides a simple timer on/off control without the need for need for
additional instrumentation.
General Information
16
4
4.1
Application Wiring
Overview
This section provides electrical installation information specific to the application. It defines input
and output wiring to supplement the information provided in the drive installation manual.
4.2
Wiring Standards and Codes

The installation crew is responsible for following the wiring plan produced by the design engineer
for the specific application. All wiring must conform to applicable national and local codes.
4.2.1
Attention
The supplier cannot assume responsibility for compliance or non-compliance to any code
governing the proper installation of this unit. The following information is intended only as
a guide for proper installation. All wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code
(NEC), described in publication NFPA No. 70. Local codes may overrule this information.
Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring the control signals:
Always disconnect and lock out all electrical supplies before working on the drive or associated
system equipment.
When disconnecting wires from the screw terminals, completely loosen the screws before
pulling out the wires
Tie shields to Logic Common at one end only
Twist differential () current input signals together
General Information
Application Wiring
17
4.2.2
100MHz Control Module Terminal Block Location

AnyBus Interface
Case Ground
CON4
2 1
CON7
J3
MaxStream Wireless
Communication Module
(optional)
AnyBus Serial
Communication Module
(optional)
Auxiliary
Asynchronous
Serial Interface #2
(RS-422/485)
CON7
CON12
J6
Auxiliary
Asynchronous
Serial Interface #1
(RS-422/485)
CON17
J2A
Synchronous
Serial Interface
(SSI)
Asynchronous
Serial Interface
Incremental Encoder, Resolver, or

Analog Interface Module
(optional)
J2B
RS-232
J11
RS-422/
485
J12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
CON19
Encoder Interface
(optional)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
TB1
TB2
Asynchronous
Serial Interface
(RS-422/485)
4.2.3
Digital
Inputs/Outputs
Analog
Inputs/Outputs
Compact 100MHz Control Module Terminal Block Location
Synchronous
Serial Interface (SSI)
(100 MHz only)
J2A
J2B
CON12
Asynchronous
Serial Interface
RS-232
J1
RS-422/
485
J3
J4
TB1
TB2
Auxiliary
Asynchronous
Serial Interface
(RS-422/485)
(100 MHz only)
CON15
(optional)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Asynchronous Serial
Interface (RS-422/485)
Encoder Interface
Digital
Analog
Inputs/Outputs Inputs/Outputs
General Information
Application Wiring
18
4.3
Control Module Serial Input Connection

Descriptions
The drive provides both asynchronous and synchronous serial communication ports. Serial
communication connections are made at the Control Module. Serial communication protocols are
selected on a per-port basis. Available protocols include:
ANSI
Modbus RTU
AnyBus
ESP
Drive Menu
Remote Keypad
A Well Master
Zenith Master
Modbus RTU Master
For AnyBus and MaxStream serial communication modules please refer to the module
manufacturers instructions.
4.3.1
Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistors

When networking two or more drives for either synchronous or asynchronous communications,
remove the terminating resistors in all drives except the last one. With a synchronous network, this
is the slave drive farthest from the master.
Pull-up and pull-down resistors are generally required on the receive lines of the host computer to
prevent the host from receiving noise, and to establish the ground reference for the serial port of
the drive. In some networks, it may be necessary to remove the pull-up and pull-down resistors on
the receive lines of the drive.
4.3.1.1
Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistor Location
Resistor
100 MHz
Compact
100 MHz
(121 )
Terminating
R135
R27
R75
R90
R82
R126
General Information
Application Wiring
19
4.3.2
Resistor
100 MHz
Compact
100 MHz
(1.5 k)
Pull-up
R134
R15
R74
R92
R82
R127
(1.5 k)
Pull-down
R137
R26
R83
R91
R83
R128
RJ-45 Connector Pin-Outs

RS-232
RS-422/485
+5 V DC
+5 V DC
+5 V DC
+5 V DC
Receive
Receive (+)
Logic Common
Receive (-)
Logic Common
Transmit (-)
Transmit
Transmit (+)
Logic Common
Logic Common
Logic Common
Logic Common
Pin
4.3.3
Console PortAsynchronous Serial Interface

For the Console Ports isolated Asynchronous Serial Communications, either TB1-1 through TB1-4
may or one of the RJ-45 style connectors labeled J11 and J12 on the 100 MHz Control Module and
J1 and J3 on the Compact 100 MHz Control module. Only one connection choice may be made.
4.3.3.1
4.3.4
Console Port Serial Connections at the Terminal Block
TB1-1
TB1-2
Transmit-
TB1-3
Receive-
TB1-4
Receive+
Transmit+
Port AAuxiliary Asynchronous Serial Interface #1

For Port As isolated Asynchronous Serial Communications, use the RJ-45 style connectors labeled
J6 on the 100 MHz Control Module and J4 on the Compact 100 MHz Control module.
4.3.5
Port BAuxiliary Asynchronous Serial Interface #2

For Port Bs isolated Asynchronous Serial Communications, use the RJ-45 style connectors labeled
J3 on the 100 MHz Control Module and is not available on the Compact 100 MHz Control module.
General Information
Application Wiring
20
4.3.6
Digital Input and Output Connections TB1 (Discrete

Parallel I/O)
Digital inputs and outputs are connected at the terminal block labeled TB1 on the control module.
4.3.7
Digital Output Connection TB1 (Discrete Parallel Outputs)

There are 6 user-definable digital outputs parametrically multiplexed to provide signals to
operational states within the application. The user defines the functionality of each output by
selecting from a list, explained in section on Digital I/O Menu.
4.3.8
TB1-5
Functionality controlled by digital out 0 select parameter in Digital I/O Menu.
TB1-6
TB1-7
TB1-8
TB1-9
TB1-10 Functionality controlled by digital out 5 select parameter in Digital I/O Menu.
Digital Input Connections TB1 (Discrete Parallel Inputs)

Digital Inputs need to sink 1mA to Logic common to assert the input.
4.4
TB1-11 Logic Common for asserting digital inputs.
TB1-12 Functionality controlled by digital in 0 select parameter in Digital I/O Menu.
TB1-21 Hand Mode Enable. If this input is asserted along with the Run Enable input, the unit
will operate in Hand mode. In Hand mode, the unit will not automatically restart upon a fault. All
other functionality is the same.
TB1-22 Auto Mode Enable. If this input is asserted along with the Run Enable input, the unit
will operate in the normal running mode (Auto mode). If this input is lost, the unit will come to a
controlled stop at the parked position and the motor will turn off.
TB1-23 Run Enable (motor-on permissive). This input is typically permanently asserted
(jumpered to ground). On some LRP units fitted with brakes, however, this input is connected
to a brake engage switch, allowing the LRP to be stopped in mid-stroke. If this input is not
asserted, the brake will immediately engage and the motor will turn off. Note that subsequent
the loss of this input, the Safe Stop feature will retain motor control to ensure the unit is safely
stopped prior to turning the motor off.
TB1-24 +5 V DC. A regulated supply used to bias local logic devices
Analog Input and Output Connections TB2

Three on-board Analog Input Terminals and two Analog Output Terminals are connected at
terminal block TB2 on the control module.
Analog input signals may be either 0 to 10 V DC or 4 to 20 mA devices. To convert and analog
input to a 4 to 20 mA signal, install a 499 load resistor.
The Optional Analog Interface Module which mounts on the control module and provides eight
additional inputs and four additional outputs.
General Information
Application Wiring
21
4.4.1
4-20 mA Analog Input Load Resistors

The 100 MHz controller has on-board 499 load resistor terminals. Place resistor in appropriate
slot.
4.4.1.1
Channel
100 MHz
Compact 100 MHz
ADC 1
R141
R94
ADC 2
R352
R93
ADC 3
R338
R95
4-20 mA Analog Input Load Resistors Location
100 MHz ControllerAbove TB1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
Compact 100 MHz ControllerRight of TB2
Analog Input Connections TB2
TB2-1
+24 V DC. An unregulated supply used to power local I/O devices
TB2-2
Functionality assigned by source parameters in Signals In Menu
TB2-3
TB2-4
TB2-5
Analog Common
DC Power Supplies TB2
TB2-6
Logic Common.
TB2-7
+10 V DC Regulated Power Supply
TB2-8
-10 V DC Regulated Power Supply
Analog Output Connection TB2
TB2-9
TB2-10 Functionality assigned by dac 2 parameters in Signals Out Menu
Functionality assigned by dac 1 parameters in Signals Out Menu
General Information
Application Wiring
22
4.5
Analog Interface Module

The Optional Analog Interface Module mounts on the control module, and provides eight additional
analog inputs and four additional analog outputs.
4.5.1
Typical Analog Input Wiring

Customer 0 to 10 V output
Customer 0 to 10 V output
INPUT +
Customer Logic Common

(can vary within -9 to +8 V
of drive's Logic Common)
INPUT
Tie shield at one end only
LOGIC COM
4.5.2
Customer-supplied resistor to
convert 4 to 20 mA to 2 to 10 V
499
Customer 4 to 20 mA output
Customer 4 to 20 mA output
INPUT +
Customer Logic Common

(can vary within -9 to +8 V
of drive's Logic Common)
INPUT
LOGIC COM
Typical Analog Output Wiring

Customer 0 to 10 V input
+
OUTPUT
Customer 0 to 10 V input
LOGIC COM
OUTPUT 6
LOGIC COM
OUTPUT 5
INPUT 11
INPUT 11 +
INPUT 10
INPUT 10 +
LOGIC COM
INPUT 9
INPUT 9 +
INPUT 8
Analog Interface Module Connections
INPUT 8 +
4.5.3
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
OUTPUT 4
LOGIC COM
OUTPUT 3
INPUT 7
INPUT 7 +
INPUT 6
INPUT 6 +
LOGIC COM
INPUT 5
INPUT 5 +
INPUT 4
INPUT 4 +
CON2
Connector
Analog Name
CON2-1
ADC4(+)
CON2-2
ADC4(-)
CON2-3
ADC5(+)
CON2-4
ADC5(-)
CON2-5
Logic Common
CON2-6
ADC6(+)
Description
General Information
Application Wiring
23
Connector
Analog Name
CON2-7
ADC6(-)
CON2-8
ADC7(+)
CON2-9
ADC7(-)
CON2-10
DAC3
CON2-11
Logic Common
CON2-12
DAC4
CON2-13
ADC8(+)
CON2-14
ADC8(-)
CON2-15
ADC9(+)
CON2-16
ADC9(-)
CON2-17
Logic Common
CON2-18
ADC10(+)
CON2-19
ADC10(-)
CON2-20
ADC11(+)
CON2-21
ADC11(-)
CON2-22
DAC5
CON2-23
Logic Common
CON2-24
DAC6
Description
Functionality assigned by dac 3 select parameters in Signals Out Menu


General Information
Application Wiring
24
5
5.1
Operator Interface
Overview
The keypad and display located on the front of the drive or enclosure may consist of a 4x4 keypad
and 2x24 LCD character liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred as LCD), or a 16x40 graphical
liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred as GLCD). Access to all drive parameters as well as test,
diagnostic and help utilities is through the keypad and display. The keypad consists of six control
keys and ten number keys.
5.1.1
LCD Display and Keypad
5.1.2
GLCD Display and Keypad
General Information
Operator Interface
25
5.2
5.3
Basic Keypad Key Functions

Key
Name
Description
[Fn]
Function Key.
Selects the alternate function of other keys
[0] - [9]
Number Keys
Used to enter a value or select an item
[-/.]
Minus/Point Key
[/]
Up/Down Key
[Quit]
Quit Key
[Del]
Delete Key
Backspaces and/or deletes a number or character when

entering parameter values.
[Ent]
Enter Key
Enters a revised parameter value or navigates down

through the menus.
[Fn] + [0]
Clear
[Fn] + [1]
Set
Used to enter a decimal point when pressed alone.

Enters a minus sign when pressed with the [Fn] key.
Moves down a list when pressed alone.
Moves up a list when pressed with the [Fn] key.
Aborts a revised parameter entry, aborts a test procedure
or navigates up through the menus. .
Issues a fault reset request to the controller on the Active

Fault Display.
Clears various display items in the Help Menu
Clears one entry in the F/W or Event History Menus
Forces off all fault masks in the Fault Mask Display.
Clears all entries in the F/W or Event History Menus
Forces on all fault masks in the Fault Mask Display.
Menu Navigation
At the keypad, menus are navigated using the keypad using the
Key
Action
[Ent]
Enter Menu
Navigates down to the next level of the Main Display or a

selected sub-menu of the Setup Menu
[Quit]
Exit Menu
Navigates up through the menus to return to the previous

level of the Main Display or exits a sub-menu of the Setup
Menu.
[0] - [9]
Direct Select
[/]
Scroll Next
[Fn] + [/]
Scroll Previous
Description
Used to enter a directly select a menu item

Scrolls to the next menu item.
Scrolls to the previous menu item.
General Information
Operator Interface
26
5.3.1
LCD Display
Power-up Display
UNICO Sucker Rod Pump

AC 460V 125HP
Ent
Operator Display
Bar Graph Display
.........|.........
pump spm 7.3 spm
7.25 spm OPTIMZ UP

97%
RUN
Setup Menu Display

Ent
Setup Menu
1.Dictionary
Ent
535 bpd 1635

bls
57
ft 23415 cycles
**User Defined Menu

May be omitted
Setup Menu
2.Drive Test
**Values displayed here
are defined in the
Display Dictionary.
Setup Menu
3.System ID Test
(Quick Menu Edit Mode)
0 reset all meters

DISABLE
0 reset all meters

0>DISABLE
0
Ent
1 speed mode select

SWITCH
1 speed mode select

0>SWITCH
1
2 up maximum spm
12.0
spm
Setup Menu
6.Archive
Ent
3 down maximum spm

15.0
spm
3
Setup Menu
5.Faults
Ent
2 up maximum spm
12.0
spm
3 down maximum spm

15.0
spm
Ent
4 keypad up spm
8.0
spm
4 keypad up spm
8.0
spm
4
Ent
5 keypad down spm

10.0
spm
5
Setup Menu
4.AC Test
5 keypad down spm

10.0
spm
Setup Menu
7.Help Display
Setup Menu
8.Chart Display
Ent
General Information
Operator Interface
27
5.3.2
GLCD Display
Power-up Display
UNICO Sucker Rod Pump
AC 460V 150HP
Ent
Operator Display
Bar Graph Display
Setup Menu
SRP Main Display
Setup Menu
running status
pump avg spm monitor
pump speed source
pump fill monitor
AUTO RUN
8.00 spm
OPTIMZ UP
97
%
fluid avg flow monitor

fluid production meter
fluid over pump monitor
pump stroke counter
210
bpd
1635 bls
57
ft
2568 stroke
pump spm***
Ent
0.0 spm
1
2
3
4
5
6
Ent 7
8
Dictionary
Drive Test
System ID Test
AC Test
Faults
Archive
Help Display
Chart Display
** User Menu Area

(Ent)er to edit-(Quit) to exit
**Values displayed here
are defined in the
Display Dictionary.
SRP Gauge Display

gauge time
gauge run time
gauge strokes
gauge fluid production
gauge leakage
gauge avg fill
gauge avg spm
***Use arrows to
scroll between
Bar Graph Displays.
23.59 hh.mm
24.00 hh.mm
13032stroke
536 bls
5
bls
97
%
9.05 spm
gauge run time accum 7.35

gauge strokes accum
4118
gauge fluid production ac172
gauge avg fill accum
98
gauge avg spm accum 9.06
hh.mm
stroke
bls
%
spm
(Quick Data Edit Mode)

0 reset all meters
0>DISABLE
Ent
Ent
Ent
1 speed mode select

0>SWITCH
2 up maximum spm
12.0 spm
SRP Quick Data

0 reset all meters
1 speed mode select
2 up maximum spm
3 down maximum spm
4 keypad up spm
5 keypad down spm
DISABLE
SWITCH
12.0 spm
15.0 spm
8.0 spm
10.0 spm
Ent
Ent
5.3.3
3 down maximum spm

15.0 spm
4 keypad up spm
8.0 spm
5 keypad down spm
10.0 spm
Ent
Screen Power Saver

The screen saver feature shuts off power to the display when not in use. Press any key to reenable the display.
5.3.4
Power-Up Display
When the device has powered up, the drive identity screen will remain visible for a few seconds.
The drive identity screen displays the voltage and the constant torque (CT) horsepower rating.
After a few seconds, the SRP Main Display will be visible.
5.3.5
SRP Main Displays

The SRP Main Display screens show the current operating statistics of the pumping system.
General Information
Operator Interface
28
5.3.5.1
LCD Main Displays

The SRP Main Display screen shows the current operating statistics such as running status, pump
avg spm and pump fill monitor.
To access the user defined display, press the [/] key.
The SRP Quick Data screens display the predefined parameters that may be modified without the
need to navigate to the Setup Menu Dictionary. Use the [/] key navigate through the list,
returning to the SRP Main Display.
Use the [Ent] key to navigate to the Bar-graph Display.
5.3.5.2
GLCD Main Displays

The SRP Main Display screen shows the current operating statistics such as running status, pump
avg spm and pump fill monitor.
The User Defined Display with the GLCD is at the bottom of the SRP Main Display.
The SRP Gauge Display displays the daily gauged statistics and the accumulated values since the
last gauge time. The operator can navigate from the SRP Main Display to the SRP Gauge Menu
using the [/] key.
The SRP Quick Data displays predefined parameters, eliminating the need to navigate to the Setup
Menu Dictionary. The operator can navigate from the SRP Gauge Display to the SRP Quick Data
using the [/] key.
Use the [Ent] key to navigate to the Bar-graph Display.
5.3.6
Bar-graph Display
Certain readouts are displayed in bar-graph form. The operator can use the [/] key to scroll
through the pre-defined list of readouts.
Use the [Ent] key to navigate to the Setup Menu.
5.3.7
Fault Display
If a fault condition has occurred, the Fault Display will display the fault condition and the back-light
will flash. If the Fault Display is not shown, use the [Quit] key to navigate back until the Fault
Display is shown. Multiple faults will be displayed sequentially through the fault list one at a time.
To clear an existing fault condition, a fault reset request by selecting [Fn] + [0]. If a fault condition is
re-occurring, the fault screen will continue to display the fault until the condition no longer exists.
Faults displayed in capitol letters indicate that the drive was shut off by the fault. If the auto-restart
feature is enabled, the offending fault may be automatically cleared (not displayed on the main
screen); in this case, the fault can be viewed in the Faults menu (F/W History), located in the Setup
Menu.
5.3.8
Setup Menu
Setup Menu items provide access to drive parameters as well as test, diagnostic and help. There
are numerous items listed in the setup menu and each may contain several options and/or submenus.
5.3.8.1
Dictionary
The dictionary contains drive setup parameters in menu format.
5.3.8.1.1
Dictionary Setup Parameters

The dictionary in the Setup Menu contains Menus of dictionary setup parameters. These
parameters are sequentially numbered within the menu screen. This number has no relation to the
global dictionary number.
To access parameters, you may scroll using the [/] key, or use the [0] - [9] keys to jump directly to
the desired parameter. While scrolling, you may notice that some parameter numbers are skipped.
This is because certain parameters are hiddennot visible for the selected application
General Information
Operator Interface
29
configuration. To temporarily override visibility controls (make all parameters visible), use menu
visibility. To permanently override visibility controls use visibility control.
5.3.8.1.2
Editing Numeric Parameters

To edit a selected numeric parameter, first press [Ent]. The parameter value becomes left justified
and the cursor flashes on the left-most digit of the value. Type the new value. Be sure to include a
decimal point and/or minus sign as needed. If necessary, press [Del] to delete a character. To abort
the edit and retain the previous value, press [Quit]. To accept the new value and exit the edit mode,
press [Ent]. The new value is now displayed. An error message will be displayed if the value
entered is beyond minimum or maximum range limits. Some parameters cannot be edited. An
exclamation mark "!" immediately following the parameter number indicates read-only status
(cannot be edited).
5.3.8.1.3
Editing Hexadecimal Numeric Parameters

Numeric parameters can also be displayed and entered in hexadecimal formats. A parameter
displayed in hexadecimal format is denoted by prefixing the value with an x. To edit a selected
numeric parameter, first press [Ent]. The parameter value becomes left justified and the cursor
flashes on the left-most digit of the value. Type the new value. While the keypad does not contain
keys for hexadecimal digits a through f. Hexadecimal digits a through f are implemented using
function 1 though 6 respectively.
5.3.8.1.4
Editing Enumerated Parameters

Enumerated parameters are those whose values are chosen from a predefined list. To edit an
enumerated parameter, first press [Ent]. The parameter value becomes left justified and the cursor
flashes on the left-most digit of the value. Press [] to scroll through the value list. Select the new
value. To revert to the original value, press [Del]. To abort the edit and retain the previous value,
press [Quit]. To accept the new value and exit the edit mode, press [Ent]. The new value is now
displayed.
5.3.8.2
Drive Test
The Drive Test routine provides test options to assist in performance verification during
commissioning and to assist in troubleshooting possible malfunctions. Drive test operates
independently from the application software, or any UEdit software that is installed.
5.3.8.3
AC Test
The AC Test routine is used to setup and tune the AC control for the motor. This control will run
either the AC Induction or Synchronous (sometimes called DC Brushless motors). The control
converts the torque commands from the internal position/velocity/torque controller or external
velocity/torque commands into the AC current commands to the motor.
Upon entering the AC Test Utility, a series of questions are asked to give the software basic
information about the motor. Once the necessary data is entered, the routine performs the tests
that determine AC motor characteristics.
5.3.8.3.1
Attention
Personnel should be experienced in understanding the AC Test and what is about to
occur. This test will cause the motor to stop and start.
Un-coupled AC Test
The non-moving AC Test Mode will prevent motor movement during AC Test. The NON-MOVING
mode of AC TEST is recommended whenever the motor is coupled to the LRP mechanism.
5.3.8.4
Faults Menu
The Faults Menu provides access to the fault, warning and event sequential time-stamped
histories. Drive operating conditions may be configuredor maskedas a fault, warning or an
event. This menu provides the mask selection utility.
General Information
Operator Interface
30
5.3.8.4.1
Attention
Configuring a mask as a fatal fault will stop operation of the drive, however if the AutoRestart feature is enabled, the drive may restart operation.
Attention
Configuring a mask as a warning or an event will not stop operation of the drive.
Fault, Warning and Event Mask Displays

The first line of the Fault Mask Display, Warning Mask Display and Event Mask Display shows a
binary representation of a portion of a fault or warning mask. Each bit value corresponds to a
specific fault condition. A value of 1 will enable recognition the fault, while a value of 0 will disable
recognition. For each fault in the list, only one of the Fault/Warning/Event Masks should be
enabled. The cursor flashes on the bit location corresponding to the selected fault. The second line
displays the fault number and description. Press [] to scroll to the next fault. Hold [Fn] while
pressing [] to scroll to the previous fault. The ">" symbol on the first line indicates that there are
additional bits beyond those currently visible.
5.3.8.4.2
Editing the Mask

To edit a fault mask, press [Ent]. An equal sign appears behind the description. The cursor flashes
just to the right of the equal sign. Type either [0] to disable or [1] to enable recognition of the fault
condition. To abort the edit and retain the previous value, press [Quit]. To enter the new value and
exit the edit mode, press [Ent]. The new value is now shown in the corresponding bit location on
the first line. To enter a value of 1 for all bits in the fault mask, hold [Fn] + [1]. To enter a value of 0
for all maskable bits in the fault mask, hold [Fn] + [0]. Certain critical faults are unmaskable. Their
bits in the fault mask cannot be edited and will retain a value of 1.
5.3.8.4.3
Fault and Warning History Display

The first line of the Fault History Display provides the number of the displayed fault, its description,
and the total number of faults contained in the list. The fault description appears in lowercase
characters if the fault was detected while the motor was disabled. It appears in uppercase
characters if the fault was detected while the motor was enabled or if an attempt was made to
enable the motor while the fault condition existed. The second line displays the date (in
day/month/year format) and time (in hours: minutes: seconds format) that the fault was recorded.
Press [] to scroll to the next fault on the list. Hold [Fn] + [] to scroll to the previous fault on the
list. The fault most recently detected is placed at the beginning of the list. To clear the currently
displayed fault, press [Fn] + [0]. To clear the entire fault history, press [Fn] + [1].
5.3.8.4.4
Event History Display

The first line of the Event History Display provides the number of the displayed event, its
description, and the total number of events contained in the list. The second line displays the date
(in day/month/year format) and time (in hours: minutes: seconds format) that the fault was
recorded. Press [] to scroll to the next fault on the list. Hold [Fn] + [] to scroll to the previous
fault on the list. The fault most recently detected is placed at the beginning of the list. To clear the
currently displayed event, press [Fn] + [0]. To clear the entire event history, press [Fn] + [1].
General Information
Operator Interface
31
5.3.8.5
Archive Menu
The Archive Menu is used to archive or restore setup parameters, and for storing or restoring data
to non-volatile flash memory.
It is good practice to archive data from the drive periodically or when modifications have been
made to parameters. Data archiving provides a permanent storage of these parameters to your
choice of media. Data archiving also provides an efficient method of initializing the drive with the
parameters that have been stored in the unlikely event that the drive must be replaced, or repaired.
The Archive Menu option is selected from the Setup Menu of the drive. Use archive to upload
parameters, download parameters, load defaults, recall programs and data, or store programs and
data.
5.3.8.5.1
Serial Connections
Connect the drive communication port to the PC using the connections outlined in the figure below.
Select and launch Term application or another application capable or archiving data. For the
purpose of simplicity, and commonality, this document will refer to PC Term, and MAC Term.
Any port on the drive can be used to data archive. Typically the console port or port on the
motherboard of the drive is used because this port is always available. Port A or Port B, if available,
on the S1100 drive can be used by configuring this port to run the drive menu. The serial port can
support several protocols, such as RTU, ESP, etc. When archiving, the protocol must be set to
DRIVE MENU, since the archive menu must be accessed before archiving. If the port protocol is
not set to DRIVE MENU, change the console protocol, porta protocol, or portb protocol setup
to DRIVE MENU, and cycle the power to the drive. (Refer to the communication dictionary setups
for more information on port protocols.)
If the terminal program and drive are communicating properly, the menu options for the drive
should be accessible from the host computer just as they are from the keypad of the drive. If the
menus are not accessible, verify the wiring of the serial cable, and the serial settings. Serial
settings for the drive are accessible from the Comm Menu for the port that is connected to the host
computer.
5.3.8.5.2
The Archive File

Archived files are stored in text format, allowing them to be viewed from any text editor on a host
computer. The layout of the archive file shows the first line of the file with the program number and
revision of the application that has been archived. The second line of the file shows the date and
time the archive took place. The third line shows the units that the drive was in when it was
archived. Successive lines display all the dictionary items in the device in order first the dictionary
item number, the item name, the item value, the item units, and a checksum. The checksum is
compared when the elements are downloaded into the drive. If the item value is changed before
downloading, the checksum can be modified to $$ to disregard the checksum verification.
Dictionary item names preceded by a ! are readouts and may be any value. Fault masks are
displayed at the end of the archive file, although the mask values are located in the hardware mask
and the software mask items. The last line in the archive file should be $END. This indicates that
the archiving is complete.
5.3.8.5.3
Data Upload
Data upload stores the device data into a text file.
When the drive is communicating properly to the host computer, select the Archive menu from the
main setup menu using the terminal program that is connected to the drive. Do not make any
selections from the keypad, or the archiving will not work properly!
NOTE: When communicating to the drive, the ESC key on the host computer represents the QUIT
key on the keypad of the drive.
When the archive menu has been selected, several options will be offered. To upload data from the
device, select option 1 UPLOAD. When this option has been selected, the drive will display $
Press any key: Before pressing any key, the terminal emulation program running on the host
computer must be ready to receive the stream of characters, and put them into a text file. From PC
Term select Archive Text from the Data menu tab, or on MAC Term, select Archive Text
from the File tab. When this selection is made, the standard file and directory options will be
offered, and an appropriate file name should be selected to indicate the name of the drive that the
General Information
Operator Interface
32
data is coming from. When the file has been determined, the Archive text tab will be displayed with
a check mark indicating that file archiving is active.
NOTE: Values are archived in the position and velocity units displayed on the keypad.
Press any key to start the characters flowing from the device to the host computer. Do not interrupt
the stream, but wait the 20-30 seconds. When the stream has finished, $END followed by $
Press any key: will be displayed.
Before proceeding, turn off the data archiving that was enabled on the host computer, failure to do
so will result in a corrupted archive file! To turn of data archiving, select Archive Text from the
appropriate menu tab, and file archiving will be turned off if it has already been turned on.
5.3.8.5.4
Data Download
The data download operation accepts data from a text file. Once the drive is communicating
properly to the host computer, select the Archive Menu within the Setup Menu using the terminal
program that is connected to the drive. Do not make any selections from the keypad, or the
archiving will not work properly. When communicating to the drive, the ESC key on the host
computer represents the [Quit] key on the keypad of the drive.
When the archive menu has been selected, several options will be offered. To download data to the
device from the host computer, select DOWNLOAD. When this option has been selected, the drive
will display $Press ESC to cancel. The device is now ready to receive characters from the
archived text file. From PCTerm select ASCII File Send from the Load Menu tab. On MacTerm,
select ASCII File Dump from the Load Menu tab. When this selection is made, the standard file
and directory options will be offered, and an appropriate file name should be selected. When the
file has been determined, the file loading will commence and a loading status bar will display data.
When the down-loading has finished, one must cycle power to the drive to initiate any startup
variables.
5.3.8.5.5
Data Default
Loading default data can be accomplished by selecting the Default option from the Archive Menu.
When selected, the factory default values will be loaded into all the drive parameters. Typical
installations will not run properly using factory defaults, so it is best to store defaults to EPROM by
using the Recall and Store options. Use the ESC key on the host computer to exit the load default
screen without loading defaults.
5.3.8.5.6
Data Recall
Loading recall data can be accomplished by selecting the Recall option from the Archive Menu.
When selected, the data stored in a flash location within the drive can be recalled to re-write the
setups and program data to the executing program space. When RECALL is selected, the data is
displayed when the program has last been stored. Once the recall is finished, the program is reset
to begin execution.
Recall is not available unless STORE has been executed. Use recall to recover from a failure, or to
recall a program in the case of a hardware failure or upgrade. Recall keeps all the software, setups,
and UEdit programs on the flash memory chips.
5.3.8.5.7
Data Store
To permanently store a program, data, and UEdit modifications to flash program chips located on
the motherboard of the drive, select the Store option from the Archive Menu. To store all the
information to the flash memory, press the Enter key and the screen will display where the
information is stored and reset the drive. To recall stored data, select the recall option.
The first option is for selecting if all the data items in the global dictionary should be defaulted when
the data is recalled. Pressing 1 or yes causes all data items to be set to factory defaults, not the
stored value of the data item, when a recall is initiated. This option is useful if UEdit software
needs to be stored without storing the current values of the data items. Pressing 0 or no causes
all the data items to be set to the values stored in the FLASH program chips when a recall is
initiated. This option is typically used after the drive has been setup and all the data items contain
the correct values. Pressing any other key will exit the data storage menu.
The next option is for selecting if the information stored in the FLASH program chips is to be
recalled automatically when a non-volatile memory error has occurred. Pressing 1 or yes enables
this feature. While Pressing 0 or no disables the feature. If no is selected, the information stored
General Information
Operator Interface
33
in the FLASH program chips can be recalled only from the data RECALL menu. Typically this
feature should be enabled. Pressing any other key will exit the data storage menu.
Once the selection has been made, the data and UEdit are stored to the FLASH program chips.
While the information is being written, the message Storing to flash... is displayed. Once the
storing is complete, the message Reset in progress is displayed. The program then does a soft
restart and the program software is rebooted.
5.3.8.5.8
Data Erase
Select the Erase option to erase any stored programs in flash memory. This will not erase
parameter values in non-volatile memory.
5.3.8.5.9
Data Status
Provides information on how the stored program was saved to flash memory. Displays whether or
not drive will restore default data upon recall and whether or not drive will automatically restore
upon a non-volatile memory (NVMEM) fault.
5.3.8.5.10
Reset ID
If the drive has an Identification Error fault, it can be reset by loading defaults (using the archive
menu selection DEFAULT), or by loading default values by selected RESET ID from the archive
menu.
If RESET ID is selected, a prompt is displayed requesting Reset Drive ID? 1= yes, 0 = No. If 1 is
selected, the drive ID will be reset to the current drive ID, and no default values will be applied. If 0
is selected, the ID will not be reset, and defaults must be recalled from the Archive menu
5.3.8.5.11
Upload WPR
This option allows Well Production Report (WPR) data to be uploaded into a text file.
When the drive is communicating properly to the host computer, select the Archive menu from the
main setup menu (using the emulator terminal program). Do not make any selections from the
keypad, or the archiving will not work properly!
NOTE: When communicating to the drive, the ESC key on the host computer represents the QUIT
key on the keypad of the drive.
When the archive menu has been selected, several options will be offered. To upload data from the
device, select option 1 UPLOAD WPR. When this option has been selected, the drive will display $
Press any key: Before pressing any key, the terminal emulation program running on the host
computer must be ready to receive the stream of characters, and put them into a text file. From PC
Term select Archive Text from the Data menu tab, or on MAC Term, select Archive Text
from the File tab. When this selection is made, the standard file and directory options will be
offered, and an appropriate file name should be selected to indicate the name of the drive that the
data is coming from. Select .wpr as the filename extension. When the file has been determined,
the Archive text tab will be displayed with a check mark indicating that file archiving is active.
Press any key to start the characters flowing from the device to the host computer. Do not interrupt
the stream, but wait the 20-30 seconds. When the stream has finished, $END followed by $
Press any key: will be displayed.
Before proceeding, turn off the data archiving that was enabled on the host computer, failure to do
so will result in a corrupted WPR file! To turn off data archiving, select Archive Text from the
appropriate menu tab, and file archiving will be turned off if it has already been turned on.
Use the import feature of the Well Production Report generator (PN 805-525) to create the Well
production report.
General Information
Operator Interface
34
5.3.8.6
Help Display
The Help Display Menu is used to access global dictionary parameters, various diagnostic tools,
calendar setup and other utilities.
5.3.8.6.1
Feedback
This utility is used to access the variables associated with the feedback transducers. The type of
transducer interface option installed on the drive will determine which set of variables are
displayed. Pressing the down arrow key will scroll to the next variable. Holding the down arrow key
while pressing the function key will scroll to the previous variable.
5.3.8.6.2
Analog
The ANALOG utility allows monitoring of the real-time value of the various analog input channels.
The first line is a center-zero bar graph that displays 100% of full scale. The second line contains
the description and present value of the analog input signal. The value is scaled such that a value
of 10 corresponds to 100% of full scale. Use [/] to scroll to the next analog signal. Use [Fn] +
[/] to scroll to the previous analog signal.
5.3.8.6.3
PIO
The PIO utility allows monitoring the status of the digital inputs and outputs.
The I/O status can be viewed from the HELP / PIO screen. The output status can also be viewed in
the output dictionary at the end of the list of bits. Readouts are prefixed with a !.
Once on the help PIO screen, IO bits can be viewed 16 at a time. The bit can be selected by typing
in the bit number or using the arrow key to scroll through the words. The state of the bit is shown.
Use FUNCTION 0 to scroll through the function assigned to a specific bit. More than one input
function can be assigned to a single bit.
5.3.8.6.4
Clock
The CLOCK option will display the status of the internal clocks. Each foreground clock runs at a
specified frequency that is a multiple of the clock frequency setup. There are 5 clocks configured,
each has a multiple setup associated with it in the dictionary.
Clock frequencies are determined at power-up, so if any of these items are changed, control power
to the drive must be cycled. This setup is modified from the global dictionary.
clock frequency - The frequency of the slowest control loops in the drive.
drive multiple - Drive multiple sets the frequency of all the routines which execute on the drive
clock. The drive controller is the main routine which runs on the drive clock. If the clock
frequency is at 50 Hz and the drive multiple is a 5, the drive clock runs at 50 * 5 = 250 Hz.
upid multiple - The position/velocity loop controller runs on the upid clock by this multiple. If
the drive clock is at 250 Hz and the upid multiple is a 4, the upid clock runs at 250 * 4 = 1000
Hz.
ac multiple - The ac vector controller runs on the ac clock. This clock runs faster than the upid
clock by this multiple. If the upid clock is at 500 Hz and this multiple is a 2, the ac clock runs at
500 * 2 = 1000 Hz.
ac fast multiple - The ac vector rotator runs on the ac fast clock. This clock runs faster than
the ac clock by this multiple. If the ac clock is at 1000 Hz and this multiple is a 2, the ac clock
runs at 1000 * 2 = 2000 Hz.
The clock help screen is used by Unico personnel.
5.3.8.6.5
Process
The PROCESS display shows the amount of memory consumed by an individual background
process. The arrow down key and function arrow keys can be used to scroll up and down through
the processes configured within a device.
Once a process has been selected, use the Fn1 key to display the Scan time in msec of the
process, and the Maximum scan time in msec. Scan time is the amount of time from one
background scan to the next.
General Information
Operator Interface
35
Press Fn1 again to display the Exec time to executable time for the process. The executable time is
the amount of time the specific process took during its execution.
Press Fn1 again to display the process state.
Press Fn1 again to display the starting address of the process in memory.
The process help screen is used by Unico personnel.
5.3.8.6.6
Calendar
The CALENDAR chip maintains the current time and date of the drive. The calendar set time and
date are stored, and update continually despite lack of power to the drive.
To change the calendar date or time, select the calendar display from the Help menu options, and
press the ENT key to edit the date. Continue to press the ENT key until the cursor is at the item
that is desired to be changed; press the down arrow key until the desired item displays the correct
value.
Access level 3 must be granted before the time or date can be altered.
5.3.8.6.7
Controller
The CONTROLLER help option displays data about the controller. The state of the controller is
displayed first, and indicates the current status of the controller. The controller is used to manage
the drive on and off states, and charging unit states if they are used. Other information in the
controller help screen displays the status of the bits associated with the controller.
The controller help screen is used by Unico personnel.
5.3.8.6.8
SSI
The SSI is a high speed serial protocol written by Unico. This protocol transfers a minimal amount
of data at very high speeds and is typically used to couple drives together by electronically
synchronizing them. If the SSI is not used, the screen will show ssi disabled.
5.3.8.6.9
Mem
The MEM display is used by Unico personnel only. This display helps the Unico development team
track down and destroy annoying memory leaks or memory allocation problems.
5.3.8.6.10
Global Dictionary
The global dictionary, accessed from the Help Display is a sequential non-ordered list of all the
drives parameters. Used to view and/or edit parameter values.
The global dictionary must have level 3 access permission to edit values.
5.3.8.6.11
Network Map
The network map contains a list of parameter items used for access via serial communication.
The Network Map is an ordered sub-set of the drives parameters; its addressing is aliased to
access the global dictionary item number to achieve addressing stability over multiple software
revisions.
5.3.8.6.12
NVMEM
The NVMEM display is used by Unico personnel only. This display helps the Unico development
team track down and destroy annoying memory leaks or memory allocation problems.
5.3.8.6.13
Ports
The Ports Utility provides information about the serial communication ports on the Control Module.
It should be used to troubleshoot serial communications.
The X10-100MHz Control Module has 3 serial communication ports
The console port located on the lower left of the Control Module.
The port A port located on the middle right of the Control Module.
The port B port located on the upper right of the Control Module.
The X10-100MHz Compact Control Module has 2 serial communication ports

General Information
Operator Interface
36
The console port located on the lower left of the Control Module.
The port A port located on the middle right of the Control Module.
The port B port located on the upper right of the Control Module.
The PORTS display shows those serial ports that have been configured for use. The port must
have a protocol running before it will show up in the help. Select the port in question, each port
displays first:
RCNT Character receive count incremented each time a character is received.

QIN Count is incremented to the maximum qin buffer size, and then reset. QIN and QOUT
should match.
QOUT Count is incremented each time a character is removed from the input buffer.
CHAR the last character read.
SIZE the input buffer size.
Select the arrow down key to display the Transmit port information.
TCNT Character transmit count incremented each time a character is sent.

QIN Count is incremented to the maximum buffer size, and then reset.
QOUT Count is incremented to the maximum buffer size, and then reset. QIN and QOUT
should match as this indicates that the buffer is functioning properly, and not missing
characters.
CHAR is the last character written out.
SIZE is the output buffer size.
Select the arrow down key again to display protocol specific help screens.
5.3.8.6.14
UEdit Utility
The UEDIT help option displays information about any UEdit application that may be installed in
the device. If UEdit is not available to this device, the UEDIT menu option will not display.
5.3.8.6.15
System Errors
The system error log is used to record programmatic errors since power on.
The system errors help screen is used by Unico personnel.
5.3.8.7
Chart Display (Requires GLCD)

The Chart Display Menu is used to access pre-defined graphing of the current operation of the
system.
[Fn] + [0] repaints the entire chart view, and reset the scaling to the original starting values.
[Fn] + [1] erases the plot view and re-arms sampling for triggered data. It clears the area drawn with
chart channel data, but does not reset the X and Y axis scales.
Predefined Charts:
5.4
Surface DynaCard
Downhole DynaCard. Choose [Fn] + [1] to arm the trigger and display the next Downhole
DynaCard.
Crank Torque Chart
Rod and Pump Velocity Chart
IPR and Pumping Point Chart
Password Protection
The password function has 3 password levels. Security clearance is granted based on the level of
password that has been reached. Any feature in the device that is protected by a password level
will ask for the password when data is changed. The higher the password level, the more security
clearance will be granted once that level has been reached. To reach a higher security level,
General Information
Operator Interface
37
simply type the password assigned to that level when asked for a password at the password
prompt.
5.4.1
Password Selection
Password selection is made in the global dictionary.
5.4.1.1
Global Parameter: level 1 password

This value defines the level 1 password. The password can be a numeric number. If the level is
locked out, menu items will be displayed with asterisks. The default value is 0, unlocked.
5.4.1.2

5.4.1.3

5.4.1.4
Global Parameter: lockout time

The entire system will become locked out if the topmost startup screen is reached by quitting to the
power up identity screen, or if the timeout time has elapsed and it is non-zero. For example, if the
lockout time is set to 900.000 seconds and no accesses are made for a period of 15 minutes, the
system will revert to locked-out at all levels.
5.4.1.5
Global Parameter: lockout status

This value displays the current locked state of the drive. The list includes UNLOCKED, LOCKED,
LEVEL 1, LEVEL 2 AND LEVEL 3. To override lockout status if password is lost, contact Unico.
5.4.2
Dictionary Access Levels

Each dictionary has a password level, and each menu option has a password level assigned to it
as well. Dictionary items within a dictionary are always visible, but require the proper password
level to change settings. If a dictionary is assigned a level, that password level must be entered and
passed before the dictionary setups can be changed, but they can be viewed without a password
entered. Passwords will be displayed as asterisks unless the password level has been granted.
5.4.2.1
Menu Item Access Levels

If a menu item, such as Drive Test, has a password level assigned to it, that level must be passed
before the menu item can be accessed. Menu items are listed below with the status that they are
assigned:
5.4.2.2
Dictionary Access is on a per Menu item basis. Each menu has an access level assigned
to it.
Drive Test Level 3 Access
System ID Level 3 Access
AC/DC Test Level 3 Access
Faults No restriction to view them, level 3 assess required to change masks or modify the
history.
Archive Level 2 Access
Help No restriction on most help items. Level 3 password access required to change the
Calendar and the Global Dictionary sub-menus.
Chart No restriction, as the charts are display only.
Menu Item Access Levels

If the password for any password level is lost, contact Unico, Inc. for help on unlocking the locked
system.
General Information
Operator Interface
38
6
6.1
Application Dictionary Menus

Overview
The application menus contain the dictionary items (parameters) that are used to control the
operation of the drive as well as to tailor it to specific installation requirements. The parameters are
organized into logical groups for ease of navigation. All parameters may be protected from
unauthorized change by means of a password protection scheme.
The individual parameters within a menu are shown in the order they appear along with their units,
minimum value, maximum value, default value, visibility and full description.
Display parameters are continuously updated and do not have minimum, default and maximum
values defined.
Parameters may appear in more than one menu.
6.1.1
Parameter Visibility Control

To access parameters, you may scroll using the [/] key, or press the [0] - [9] keys to jump directly
to the desired parameter. While scrolling, you may notice that some parameter numbers are
skipped. This is because certain parameters are hiddennot visibleif they have no function for
the selected application configuration. To temporarily override visibility controls use menu visibility.
To permanently override visibility controls use visibility control. While most parameters hold
numeric values, some parameters have enumerated choices (enum) with values that are selected
from a list.
6.1.2
Parameter Unit Selection

The basic unit display for parameters is user-definable on a per-port basis. The basic selection is
Imperial or Metric units. Furthermore, some parameter unit display is controlled by a unit selector
parameter.
6.1.2.1
Keypad Units
To select the units displayed at the keypad, use the keypad units parameter in the Display Menu.
6.1.2.2
UEdit Software Units

To select the units displayed in UEdit, in the project window, right click on the LRP (1) Device and
choose Units. Select either 14-AngularRevsMinutesImperial or 15-AngularRevsMinutesMetric.
6.1.2.3
Console Units
To select the units sent by the Console Port, use the console units parameter in the Comm Menu.
6.1.2.4
Port A Units
To select the units sent by Port A, use the porta units parameter in the Comm Menu.
6.1.2.5
Port B Units
To select the units sent by Port B, use the portb units parameter in the Comm Menu.
6.1.2.6
User Definable Units

Once the basic Imperial vs. Metric selection has been made, use the unit selector parameters in
the Display Menu to further refine the unit display selection.
General Information
39
6.2
Operator Menu
If password protection is enabled, this menu requires Level 1 password.
Table 6-1Operator Menu Parameters

running status
0
The current operating status of the unit, useful for troubleshooting if the unit is not behaving as
expected. Values include:
Display
HAND RUNhand enable input is asserted. Auto-restarts off.

AUTO RUNauto enable input is asserted.
WELL ID RUNperforming Well ID Test
INCH FWDinch forward command is being performed.
INCH REVinch reverse command is being performed.
RESTART DELAYDrive has powered up, waiting for powerup restart delay to expire.
FAULT RESTARTAuto-restart feature is attempting to restart the system. Waiting for restart
timer to countdown to 0 (zero).
PUMP OFF WAITOptimizer Shut-Off (POC) Controller has stopped the pump. Waiting for
restart timer to expire.
TIMER WAITTimer Controller has stopped operation. Waiting for timer off time to expire.
CALENDAR WAITCalendar Controller has stopped operation. Waiting for the current date,
day, day-of-week and/or time-of-day to be within the allowable limits.
REMOTE STOPMotor turned off remotely (serially) .
PARKINGUnit is in the process of parking.
FAULTEDA fault condition currently exists. If Auto-restarts are enabled, the fault condition
may be automatically cleared when condition no longer exists. User must access the F/W
History in the Archive menu to view the offending fault (or upload the Events History using
Uedit).
MAX FAULTA fault condition exists and the maximum restart attempts has been exhausted.
Under this condition, the unit will no longer attempt to restart. Operator intervention is required
to reststart the pump. User must access the F/W History in the Archive menu to view the
offending fault (or upload the Events History using Uedit).
MOTOR OFFMotor is off. Operator intervention required.
DISABLEDThe run enable input is not asserted. Operator intervention required.
GEN FAULTA generator fault condition exists. Operator intervention required.
GEN STARTA generator start condition exists.
PARKEDThe unit is safely in the parked position.
POSITION FAULTThe unit is not tracking position correctlu, possibly indicating binding. User
must access the F/W History in the Archive menu to view the exact offending fault (or upload
the Events History using Uedit).
GB TORQUE FAULTThe unit has detected a gearbox torque in excess of snug auto max
gearbox torq, or a gearbox torque less than the snug auto min gearbox torq.
SNUG FAULTThe motor never stopped turning while attempted to snug to the hard stop
upon turning the motor on. This likely indicates a mechanical problem possibly pinion
disengagement from rack or excessive counterbalance pressure. Try reducing snug torque
limit.
REF FAULTThe unit is either not seeing the reference sensor input, or seeing it at the wrong
position. This may indicate that Well ID is required to identify the sensor locations.
While running status is in the RESTART DELAY, FAULT RESTART, PUMP OFF WAIT,
REMOTE STOP, TIMER WAIT or CALENDAR WAIT state, standby sts will be set to TRUE. A
digital output can be tied to this condition by setting the desired digital output select to
STANDBY.
General Information
40

lrp status
1
The status of the linear rod pump. Values include:
Display
MOTOR OFF
STROKE ID REQD A motor position related parameter has changed, requiring the Stroke ID
test to be executed.
POSITION ERRORPosition Error fault was detected. Check unit for torque limit (may occur
while operating unit above base speed), binding, or mechanical problem.
VELOCITY ERRORVelocity Error fault was detected. Check unit for torque limit (may occur
while operating unit above base speed), binding, or mechanical problem.
SNUG FAULTUnit did not snug to stop at the expected position. Check for mechanical
problem possibly pinion disengagement from rack or excessive counterbalance pressure. Try
reducing snug torque limit.
FAULTEDdrive fault is present.
POWER LOSSPower loss control has detected a power loss condition.
REF INPUT LOSS The reference input was not received within the expected ref window tol
target window identified during the last Well ID. The unit will immediately snug reference and
try again. Check sensor wiring and spacing. This fault may indicate that Well ID is required (or
was faulty), or that system is at torque limit.. This fault will also occur if the stroke id length
value is too small, preventing the unit from stroking up far enough to cross the sensor. This
fault may also indicate a snug problem, where the unit did not extend completely down during
the snug down it may be necessary to increase the snug torque limit. (This is especially
true of air counterbalanced units, where snug air compensation may be required.) If this fault
develops over time, it may indicate a problem with the safety spring.
MAX GEARBOX TORQGearbox torque has exceeded the snug auto max gearbox torq
parameter, indicating possible mechanical binding.
MIN GEARBOX TORQGearbox torque has dropped below the snug auto min gearbox torq
parameter (negative value), indicating possible mechanical binding.
NORMAL OPERATION
remote run enable
Used to remotely (serially) start and stop the drive. Operator intervention at the hard run
switch overrides this parameter. While Run Enable (IN 11) and/or Auto Enable (IN 10) are
open (not asserted), this value may not be changed from DISABLE. Once the Operator has
asserted the Auto Enable (IN 10) input, this value is changed to ENABLE. Subsequently, the
operation of the Drive may be remotely stopped by serially writing a 0 (ENABLE -> DISABLE)
to this parameter and remotely restarted by writing a 1 (DISABLE -> ENABLE).
! Attention
For safety reasons, always remove serial connections to the drive before working on
equipment, thereby preventing another user from remotely starting the pump.
Units: enum
remote fault reset
Used to remotely (serially) issue a fault-reset request to clear ANY/ALL existing faults. No fault
conditions are exempted from being remotely reset. Care and consideration should be used
before issuing a request. After issuing the request a fault condition may still exist. Shortly after
value is changed to ENABLE it will return to DISABLE.
! Attention
Units: enum
pump speed source
The source of the pump speed set point.
Units: enum
The pumping speed averaged over the last ten strokes.
Units: spm
read/write
read/write
display
display
General Information
41

pump spm monitor
6
The pumping speed averaged over the last stroke.
Units: spm
pump fill monitor
7
The pump fill percentage including fluid and gas (at pump discharge pressure) as a percentage
of the total capacity of the pump.
-1 The pump fill has yet to be determined, usually during the first two strokes of operation.
-2
display
The upstroke load has not exceeded the fill high trigger. This usually indicates a flumping
pump, broken rod/pump, or extremely high fluid level.
0% 100%
8
display
The measured pump fill. This value will be the sum of liquid fill monitor and
gas fill monitor, expressed as a percentage of the total volume of the pump.
Units: %
liquid fill monitor
The amount liquid in the pump as a percentage of the total capacity of the pump.
-2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Units: %
gas fill monitor
The amount gas in the pump as a percentage of the total capacity of the pump.
-1
The gas fill is undeterminate, usually during the first few strokes of
operation.
-2
The load has not passed the fill high trigger test.
0% 100%
The measured gas fill.
Units: %
The estimated casing fluid level above the pump, derived from the inferred fluid load on the
pump, the casing pressure, tubing pressure, and the calculated fluid weight.
Units: ft/m
fluid level monitor
The estimated casing fluid level from the surface,derived from the inferred fluid load on the
pump, the casing pressure, tubing pressure, and the calculated fluid weight.
Units: ft/m
fluid level calibrate
Used to calibrate the fluid over pump monitor estimate. Enter the known fluid level value, in
feet from the surface, and fluid level offset will be determined.
Units: ft/m
Min: 0
Max: pump depth Default: 0
fluid flow monitor
The fluid flow of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and
stroking rate, updated once per stroke.
Units: fluid flow units
plunger leakage
The estimated leakage or slippage in the down-hole pump averaged over the previous
stroke.
The oil flow of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill, water
cut and stroking rate, averaged over the previous ten strokes.
gas flow monitor
The gas flow of the pump from a sensor input.
Visibility:
gas flow source is not disabled
Units: gas flow units
fluid production meter
The total fluid production since the last reset of the parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset. The
meter rollover when it reaches 999999. May also be reset using reset all meters.
Units: volume units
display
display
display
display
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
General Information
42

18 gas production meter
The total gas production since the last reset of the parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset. The
meter rollover when it reaches 999999. May also be reset using reset all meters.
Visibility:
Units: mcf/scm
19 pump stroke counter
The number of strokes of the pump since the last reset of the parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to
reset. Value will rollover after it reaches 25000. May also be reset using reset all meters.
Units: strokes
20 input power meter
The cumulative input power consumed by the drive since the last reset of the parameter. Enter
0 (zero) to reset. May also be reset using reset all meters.
Units: kwh
21 reset all meters
Enable to reset the input power meter, fluid production meter, oil production meter, water
production meter, gas production meter and pump stroke counter.
Units: enum
22 cumulative run hours
The totalized time the unit has been running (with the motor on) since last reset. This
parameter is user changeable (resettable), but is not reset with the reset all meters parameter.
Units: hh.mm
23 maximum rod load
Maximum rod load recorded for the last stroke of the pump.
Units: lb/kg
24 minimum rod load
Minimum rod load recorded for the last stroke of the pump.
Units: lb/kg
25 pump load monitor
The weight of the fluid being lifted by the pump, derived from the downhole pump
dynamometer plot.
Units: lb/kg
26 API pump stroke
The stroking distance of the pump body derived from the rod string resonance, fluid weight,
and the stroking rate of the pump.
Units: inch/mm
27 balance monitor
The pump imbalance derived from the peak gearbox torque during the upstroke and the
downstroke.
Units: in*lb/Nm or lb/kg
28 software number
29
30
31
32
Used to identify the application software that is installed.

revision number
display
display
display
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
Used to identify the application software revision that is installed.

LRP maintenance
A rolling display of all current maintenance alarms.
SRP troubleshooter
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages. A value of NONE indicates
that there are no items that currently need to be addressed.
menu visibility
Used to hide those parameters which are not in use, simplifying menu usage and navigation.
Choose MINIMIZE to limit the parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view all menu
parameters.
Value is reset to MINIMIZE when power is cycled.
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
43
6.3
Gauge Menu
Table 6-2Gauge Menu Parameters

gauge time
0
The time of day for the controller to latch the gauged values and reinitialize the accumulating
values. Gauging will occur once every 24 hours at gauge time. If so masked, the gauged
values will also be stored in the Gauge Event in the Event History.
Units: hh.mm
Min: 0.01
Max: 23.59
Default: 23.59
gauge run time
1
The amount of time that the pumping unit was in operation accumulated over the past 24 hours
and latched at gauge time.
Units: hh.mm
gauge fluid production
2
The fluid production (fluid raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated over the past
24 hours and latched at gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated below.
Units: volume units
gauge leakage
3
The leakageor slippageof fluid past the plunger of the pump accumulated over the past 24
hours and latched at gauge time.
Units: volume units
gauge oil production
4
The oil production (oil raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated over the past 24
hours and latched at gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: volume units
gauge water production
5
The water production (water raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated over the
past 24 hours and latched at gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: volume units
gauge gas productionThe gas production (water raised to the surface) of the pumping unit
6
accumulated over the past 24 hours and latched at gauge time.
Visibility:
Units: mcf/scm
gauge strokes
7
The number of strokes of the pumping unit accumulated over the past 24 hours and latched at
gauge time.
Units: strokes
gauge avg fill
8
The average pump fill of the pump accumulated over the past 24 hours and latched at gauge
time.
Units: %
gauge avg spm
9
The average spm of the pumping unit over the past 24 hours and latched at gauge time.
Units: spm
10 gauge POC count
The count of pump-off controller (running status = PSTANDBY) induced stoppages latched at
gauge time.
Units: strokes
11 gauge fluid flow
The rate of production of the pumping unit accumulated over the run time of the past 24 hours
and latched at gauge time.
12 gauge power meter
The power usage of the pump accumulated during the run time over the past 24 hours and
latched at gauge time.
Units: kwh/day
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
General Information
44
Table 6-2Gauge Menu Parameters

13 gauge energy consumption
The power usage of the pump accumulated during the run time over the past 24 hours and
latched at gauge time.
Units: kwh/barrel
14 gauge run time accum
The amount of time that the pumping unit was in operation accumulated since the last gauge
time.
Units: hh.mm
15 gauge fluid production accum
The fluid production (fluid raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated since the last
gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated below.
Units: volume units
16 gauge leakage accum
The leakageor slippageof fluid past the plunger of the pump accumulated since the last
gauge time.
Units: volume units
17 gauge oil production accum
The oil production (oil raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated since the last
gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: volume units
18 gauge water production accum
The water production (water raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated since the
last gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: volume units
19 gauge gas production accum
The gas production (gas raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated since the last
gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Visibility:
Units: mcf/scm
20 gauge strokes accum
The number of strokes of the pumping unit accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: strokes
21 gauge avg fill accum
The average pump fill of the pump accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: %
22 gauge avg spm accum
The average spm of the pumping unit accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: spm
23 gauge POC count accum
The count of pump-off controller induced stoppages since the last gauge time.
Units: decimal
24 gauge power meter accum
The power usage of the pump accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: kwh/day
25 gauge troubleshooter
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages for this menu. A value of
NONE indicates that there are no items that currently need addressed for this menu.
Troubleshooter Message(s):
GAUGE EVENT DISABLED
Event mask is off. The gauge event will not be
latched.
26 SRP troubleshooter
27 menu visibilityUsed to hide those parameters which are not in use to simplify menu usage
and navigation. Choose MINIMIZE to limit the parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view
all menu parameters.
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
45
6.4
Valve Check Menu

Table 6-3Valve Check Menu Parameters

valve check enable
0
The valve check test is executed by setting valve check enable to ENABLE (can be enabled
while the motor is running or stopped). The test lasts approximately two minutes. The pump
will stroke four times, dwell during the upstroke (traveling valve check), stroke two more times,
and dwell during the downstroke (standing valve check). Upon completion, the test
automatically disables itself, and normal operation is resumed. The following parameters
control the speeds, positions of dwell, and duration of dwell times.
Units: enum
valve check auto
1
The time of the daily Valve Check Test. Use 0.00 to disable daily testing
Units: hh.mm
Min: 0.00
Max: 23.59
Default: 0.00
valve check run spm
2
The speed at which the pump strokes during the valve check test. The pump will slow to of
valve check run spm just prior to the dwell portions of the test.
Units: spm
Min: 0
Max: up maximum spm
Default: 4.0
valve check dwell spm
3
The speed at which the pump will dwell during the dwell portions of the valve check test. The
valve check dwell spm is normally set to zero (causing the motor to stop). A very slow dwell
speed may be used to diagnose a split barrel (or may be necessary if zero speed causes the
motor to slip backwards).
Units: spm
Min: 0.0
Max: up maximum spm
Default: 0.0
valve check tv dwell time
4
The duration of time the motor will dwell (running at valve check dwell spm) during the dwell
portion of the traveling valve test.
Units: sec
Min: 1.000
Max: 200.000
Default: 10.000
valve check tv rod pos
5
The rod position where the motor will begin decelerating to the dwell state of the traveling
valve test, measured as a percentage of rod position (where a value of 100% corresponds to
rod at top position). Varying the valve check tv rod pos can help diagnose a split or worn
barrel.
Units: %
Min: 20
Max: 80
Default: 60
valve check sv dwell time
6
The duration of time the motor will dwell (running at valve check dwell spm) during the dwell
portion of the standing valve test.
Units: sec
Min: 1.000
Max: 200.000
Default: 20.000
valve check sv rod pos
7
The rod position where the motor will begin decelerating to the dwell state of the standing
valve test, measured as a percentage of rod position (where a value of 100% corresponds to
rod at top position). Varying the valve check sv rod pos can help diagnose a split barrel.
Units: %
Min: 20
Max: 80
Default: 40
tv check rod load 1
8
The starting value of rod load measured during the traveling valve check dwell state, latched
just after the motor has settled to valve check dwell spm.
Units: lb/kg
tv check rod load 2
9
The ending value of rod load measured during the traveling valve check dwell state, latched
after the valve check tv dwell time has elapsed.
Units: lb/kg
10 tv check rod pos 1
The starting value of rod position measured during the traveling valve check dwell state,
latched just after the motor has settled to valve check dwell spm.
Units: inch/mm
11 tv check rod pos 2
The ending value of rod position measured during the traveling valve check dwell state,
latched just after the valve check tv dwell time has elapsed.
Units: inch/mm
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
General Information
46
Table 6-3Valve Check Menu Parameters

12 sv check rod load 1The starting value of rod load measured during the standing valve check
dwell state, latched just after the motor has settled to valve check dwell spm.
Units: lb/kg
13 sv check rod load 2The ending value of rod load measured during the standing valve check
dwell state, latched after the valve check tv dwell time has elapsed.
Units: lb/kg
14 sv check rod pos 1The starting value of rod position measured during the standing valve
check dwell state, latched just after the motor has settled to valve check dwell spm.
Units: inch/mm
15 sv check rod pos 2The ending value of rod position measured during the standing valve
check dwell state, latched just after the valve check tv dwell time has elapsed.
Units: inch/mm
16 tv load change
A measure of the load change that occurred during the traveling valve test dwell state.
Units: lb/s or kg/s
17 sv load change
A measure of the load change that occurred during the standing valve test dwell state.
Units: lb/s or kg/s
18 tv static leak rate
The static leakage rate for the traveling valve and plunger as determined by the valve test.
This is the leakage rate during the upstroke.
19 sv static leak rate
The static leakage rate for the standing valve as determined by the valve test. This is the
leakage rate during the downstroke.
20 meas plunger clearance
The measured pump clearance as measured during the Valve Check Test. This value is
automatically applied as plunger clearance at the end of the Valve Check Test.
Units: inch/mm
21 valve check state
A display of the status of the valve check test. Values include vc wait, tv initialize, tv dwell 1, tv
dwell 2, sv initialize, sv dwell 1, sv dwell 2, vc finalize, vc done.
Units: enum
22 valve check date
The date of the last Valve Check Test.
Units: yyyy.mmdd
23 valve check time
The time of the last Valve Check Test.
Units: hh.mm
24 valve check troubleshooter
PERFORM VALVE CHECK TEST
The test has not been completed.
TV DID NOT HOLD POS
Unable to hold position. Use valve check dwell spm.
SV DID NOT HOLD POS
Unable to hold position. Use valve check dwell spm.
VALVE CK EVEN DISABLED
Event mask off. The valve check event will not be
latched.
that there are no items that currently need addressed.
26 menu visibility
Used to hide those parameters which are not in use to simplify menu usage and navigation.
parameters.
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
47
6.5
Maintenance Menu
Table 6-4Maintenance Menu Parameters

lrp maintenance
0
A rolling display of all current maintenance alarms.
Maintenance Message(s):
NONE, GEARBOX LUBE, RACK LUBE, STUFFING BOX, TV LEAKAGE, SV LEAKAGE
maintenance reset
1
Resets the maintenance message and counter for the selected item.
Units: enum
maint gearbox lube
2
The number of strokes between GEARBOX LUBE notifications. To disable the GEARBOX
LUBE maintenance message, set this parameter to zero.
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Max: 6000000
Default: 3000000
maint gearbox count
3
Gearbox lube stroke counter. When this count equals the maint gearbox lube value, the
GEARBOX LUBE message will be set.
Units: strokes
maint rack lube
4
The number of strokes between RACK LUBE notifications. To disable the RACK LUBE
maintenance message, set this parameter to zero.
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Max: 6000000
Default: 3000000
maint rack count
5
Rack lube stroke counter. When this count equals the maint rack lube value, the RACK LUBE
message will be set.
Units: strokes
maint stuff box
6
The number of strokes between STUFFING BOX notifications. To disable the STUFFING BOX
maintenance message, set this parameter to zero.
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Max: 6000000
Default: 3000000
maint stuff count
7
Stuffing box stroke counter. When this count equals the maint stuff box value, the STUFFING
BOX message will be set.
Units: strokes
tv static leak rate
8
The static leakage rate for the traveling valve and plunger as determined by the valve test.
This is the leakage rate during the upstroke.
maint traveling valve
9
The limit for traveling valve leakage notification.
Units: fluid flow units Min: 0
Max: 99999
Default: 0
10 sv static leak rate
The static leakage rate for the standing valve as determined by the valve test. This is the
leakage rate during the downstroke.
11 maint standing valve
The limit for standing valve leakage notification.
Max: 999999
Default: 0
13 menu visibility
parameters.
display
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
display
read/write
display
display
read/write
display
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
48
6.6
Feature List Menu

Table 6-5Feature List Menu

auto trigger
0
State of pump fill Auto Trigger feature, either ON or OFF.
auto restarts
1
State of the Auto Restarts feature (automatic restart from a fault condition), either ON or OFF.
optimizer
2
State of Optimizer Controller, either ON or OFF.
timer poc
3
State of Timer POC Controller, either ON or OFF.
bridle control
4
State of the Bridle Separation Controller, either ON or OFF. A sensor-free bridle separation
limiter prevents or limits rod float by automatically adjusting pumping speed.
calendar control
5
State of Calendar Controller and/or Timer Controller, either ON or OFF. Calendar Controller
controls power usage by limiting operation by time of day, weekday or weekend and month.
Timer Controller provides a simple timer on/off control without the need for need for additional
instrumentation. Uses the parameters in the Calendar Menu.
EOP controller
6
State of Enhanced Oil Production, EOP Controller, either ON or OFF.
casing valve controller
7
State of Casing Valve Controller, either ON or OFF.
SRP troubleshooter
8
menu visibility
9
parameters.
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
49
6.7
Pump Speed Menu

Table 6-6Pump Speed Parameters

pump spm monitor
0
The speed of the pump averaged over one full stroke.
Units: spm
1
The speed of the pump averaged over the previous ten strokes.
Units: spm
pump speed source
2
The source of the pump speed set point.
3
9
10
11
12
Units: enum
speed mode select
Used to select the pump speed mode of operation, including: SINGLE SPEED, DUAL SPEED,
OPTIMIZED SPEED, and SWITCH (SWITCH diverts pump speed mode control to an optional
three-position selector switch on the exterior of the enclosure).
Units: enum
speed SDO select
Displays the current pump speed mode as determined by the external SDO
(Single/Dual/Optimize) selector switch.
Visibility:
speed mode select = SWITCH
Units: enum
max possible SPM
The maximum speed the pumping unit is capable of operating given the current setup
parameters.
Units: Strokes per Minute
up maximum spm
The maximum upstroke speed limit of the pump. Also serves as the overall maximum speed
when in single speed modes.
Units: spm
Min: up minimum spm
Max: max possible spm
Default: max possible
spm
up minimum spm
The minimum upstroke speed limit of the pump. Also serves as the overall minimum speed
Units: spm
Min: 1.0
Default: 2.5
down maximum spm
The maximum downstroke speed limit of the pump.
Units: spm
Min: down minimum spm Max: max possible spm
spm
down minimum spm
The minimum downstroke speed limit of the pump.
Units: spm
Min: 1.0
Default: 2.5
up speed source
Used to select the upstroke speed source. Enumerated values include: KEYPAD, ADC 1
ADC 11, SERIAL SLAVE.
Units: enum
keypad up spm
When up speed source is KEYPAD, the user enters the desired upstroke speed here. If speed
mode select is SINGLE SPEED, keypad up spm value will be used for both upstroke and
downstroke speeds.
Visibility:
up speed source = KEYPAD
Units: spm
Min: up minimum spm Max: up maximum spm
Default: 250
ADC up spm
If up speed source is ADC 1 ADC 11, this is the speed value associated with the up speed
analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if up speed source = DISABLED.
Visibility:
up speed source is ADC 1 ADC 11
Units: spm
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
50

13 external up spm
If up speed source is SERIAL SLAVE, the user enters the desired upstroke speed in external
up spm.
Visibility:
up speed source is SERIAL SLAVE
Units: spm
Default: 250.0
14 down speed source
Used to select the downstroke speed source. Enumerated values include: KEYPAD, ADC 1
Visibility:
speed mode select is not SINGLE SPEED
Units: enum
15 keypad down spm
When down speed source is KEYPAD, the user enters the desired upstroke speed here.
Visibility:
down speed source is KEYPAD
Units: spm
Min: down minimum spm Max: down maximum spm Default: 6
16 ADC down spm
If down speed source is ADC 1 ADC 11, this is the speed value associated with the down
speed analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if down speed source = DISABLED.
Visibility:
down speed source is ADC 1 ADC 11
Units: spm
17 external down spm
If down speed source is SERIAL SLAVE, the user enters the desired downstroke speed in
external up spm.
Visibility:
down speed source is SERIAL SLAVE
Units: spm
Min: down minimum spm Max: down maximum spm Default: 250.0
18 inch speed
The inch mode speed, used when the inch forward/reverse feature is used.
Units: inches/s Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 5
19 power loss speed
The speed to run during the parking portion of a controlled power loss stop.
Units: inches/s Min: 2
Max: 30
Default: 4
20 request spm
The current requested speed.
Units: spm
21 request spm up
The requested upstroke speed.
Units: spm
22 request spm down
The requested downstroke speed.
Units: spm
23 SRP motor vel rpm
The instantaneous speed of the motor.
Units: rpm
24 rod velocity monitor
The instantaneous rod velocity.
Units: inches/s
25 pump speed troubleshooter
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages for the menu. A value of
REQUEST SPM 0
request spm is 0. Check speed
source.
NO VALID SWITCH INPUT
speed source select is SWITCH and neither input is
asserted.
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
General Information
51

27 menu visibility
Used to hide those parameters which are not in use. Choose MINIMIZE to limit the
parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view all menu parameters.
read/write
General Information
52
6.8
Pump Fill Menu

Table 6-7Pump Fill Parameters

pump fill monitor
0
The pump fill percentage including fluid and gas (at pump discharge pressure) as a percentage
of the total capacity of the pump.
-2
0% 100%
1
display
Units: %
liquid fill monitor
The amount of liquid in the pump as a percentage of the total capacity of the pump.
-2
Units: %
gas fill monitor
The amount gas in the pump as a percentage of the total capacity of the pump.
-1
The pump fill is indeterminate, usually during the first two strokes of
operation.
-2
The load has not passed the fill high trigger test.
0% 100%
The measured gas fill.
Units: %
fill source
Used to select the method for determining pump fill monitor.
ROD LOAD: Pump Fill is derived the Actual Surface DynaCard.
PUMP LOAD: Pump Fill is derived from Inferred Down-hole DynaCard.
Units: enum
fill trigger mode
Enable this parameter to automatically select fill low trigger (fill low trigger will automatically
adapt to changing pumping conditions).
Visibility:
fill source = PUMP LOAD
Units: enum
auto low trigger
If fill trigger mode = AUTO, fill low trigger will automatically be set to auto low trigger % of the
measured pump load.
Visibility:
Units: % pump load Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 25
auto high trigger
If fill trigger mode = AUTO, fill high trigger will automatically be set to fill low trigger + auto high
trigger % of the API max fluid load.
Visibility:
Units: % pump load Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 10
fill low trigger
The low trigger level used in the Pump Fill detection algorithm. Enter an appropriate value if fill
trigger mode is not set to AUTO.
Units: lb/kg
Min: -100000
Max: 100000
Default: 0
fill high trigger
The high trigger level used in the Pump Fill detection algorithm. Enter an appropriate value if
fill trigger mode is not set to AUTO.
Units: lb/kg
Min: -100000
Max: 100000
Default: 0
pump fill offset
Used to manually adjust (offset) the pump fill monitor display.
Units: %
Min: -10
Max: 10
Default: 0
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
53
Table 6-7Pump Fill Parameters

10 rod weight buoyant
The buoyant weight of the vertical portion of the rod derived from rod dimensions and fluid
characteristics. This display may be helpful in selecting fill low trigger and fill high trigger when
fill source = ROD LOAD.
Units: lb/kg
11 minimum rod load
Minimum rod load captured each stroke of the pump. This display may be helpful in selecting
fill low trigger and fill high trigger when fill source = ROD LOAD.
Units: lb
12 API max fluid load
The maximum theoretical fluid load exerted on the pump given zero feet of fluid over the pump
(and current fluid/pump parameter settings). This display may be helpful in selecting fill low
trigger and fill high trigger when fill source = PUMP LOAD and fill trigger mode = MANUAL.
Units: lb
The weight of the fluid being lifted by the pump as derived from the downhole pump load. This
display may be helpful in selecting fill low trigger and fill high trigger when fill source = PUMP
LOAD and fill trigger mode = MANUAL.
Units: lb
14 pump stroke inferred
The inferred pump stroke as derived from the inferred downhole pump stroke. Used along with
tubing stretch to determine the net pump stroke for measuring pump fill monitor.
Units: inch/mm
15 tubing stretch
The amount of tubing stretch. Used along with pump stroke inferred to determine the net
pump stroke for measuring pump fill monitor.
Units: inch/mm
16 rod load monitor
The instantaneous rod load. This display may be helpful in selecting fill low trigger and fill high
trigger when fill source = PUMP LOAD and fill trigger mode = MANUAL.
Units: lb
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
General Information
54
6.9
Optimizer Menu
Table 6-8Optimizer Parameters

0
Units: enum
optimize state
1
The current state of the Pump Fill Control Optimizer.
INIT (initializing) indicates a wait condition.
FASTER indicates that the drive is increasing speed to reduce pump fill.
SLOWER indicates that the drive is decreasing speed to increase pump fill.
HOLD indicates that the drive is holding the current speed.
FASTER CYCL indicates that the drive is increasing speed during a Cycle mode test.
AT MAX SPEED indicates that the controller is at maximum speed.
AT MIN SPEED indicates that the controller is at maximum speed.
MAX SPEED CYCL indicates that the controller is at maximum speed during a Cycle mode
test.
MIN SPEED CYCL indicates that the controller is at maximum speed during a Cycle mode
test.
SHUTOFF indicates that the Optimizer has stopped the pump (shut off mode).
Units: enum
pump fill monitor
2
The pump total fill expressed as a percentage of pump capacity.
-2
read/write
display
Display
0% 100%
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: -1
optimz start spm
The speed at which the unit will first run when placed into Optimize mode, or when the motor is
first turned on in Optimize mode.
Units: spm
Default: 7.0
optimz max fill
If pump fill monitor is greater than or equal to this value for at least three consecutive strokes
and the Optimizer is running at maximum speed, the pump will not slow down for a "soft
landing" during the downstroke, allowing increased production with a full pump (for example, if
fluid level is high). If optimz max fill is set to zero and the Optimizer is running at maximum
speed, the unit will never slow down for soft landing (allowing maximum production rate with
low pump fill). If optimz max fill is set to 100%, the unit will always slow down for soft landing
unless the pump fill monitor is equal to 100% and the Optimizer is running at maximum
speed.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 94
optimz target fill
The desired pump fill. The Optimizer will attempt to achieve this pump fill by regulating pump
speed accordingly.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 87
optimz ki
This parameter controls the rate at which the Optimizer will adjust speed as it corrects for a
difference between the target pump fill and actual pump fill. If the value is too large, the pump
speed will oscillate around the target fill setpoint. If the value is too small, the pump will take
too long to respond to a change in the pump fill setpoint.
Units: gain
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 3
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
55

optimz kp
7
This parameter controls the magnitude of velocity slow-down prior to fluid impact on the
downstroke, affecting both the "soft landing" feature and the proportional term of the Optimizer
pump fill controller.
Units: gain
Min: 10
Max: 60
Default: 30
optimz down boost
8
This parameter can be used to create a speed differential between upstroke and downstroke
while in Optimize mode. If it is desired to have the downstroke run faster or slower than the
upstroke, set the optimz down boost as the desired differential percentage.
Units: %
Min: -75
Max: 75
Default: 0
optimz shutoff fill
9
If the pump fill monitor is less than this value for optimz shutoff delay consecutive strokes, and
the Optimizer is running the pump at minimum speed, the pump will shut-off for an
automatically determined period of time. The shut-off time is constrained by optimz min shutoff
and optimz max shutoff parameters.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 65
10 optimz shutoff delay
If the pump fill monitor is less than optimz shutoff fill for optimz shutoff delay consecutive
strokes, and the Optimizer is running the pump at minimum speed, the pump will shut-off for
an automatically determined period of time. The shut-off time is constrained by optimz min
shutoff and optimz max shutoff parameters.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 10000
Default: 5
11 optimz min shutoff
The minimum amount of time the pump will dwell (shut off) in Optimizer Shutoff mode (when
pump fill monitor drops below optimz shutoff fill value).
Units: minutes
Min: 0
Max: 240
Default: 1
12 optimz max shutoff
The maximum amount of time the pump will dwell (shut off) in Optimizer Shutoff mode (when
pump fill monitor drops below optimz shutoff fill value). Set to zero to disable Optimizer Shutoff
mode.
Units: minutes
Min: 0
Max: 480
Default: 30
13 restart timer
A countdown of the motor restart event. If in an Optimize Shutoff dwell, the restart timer
indicates the remaining time before the motor will restart.
Units: minutes
14 optimz cycle mode
If this parameter is set to ENABLE, the Optimizer Cycle Mode is enabled. During Optimizer
Cycle Mode, the Optimizer will periodically reduce the pump fill to the optimz cycle fill value.
The time period between these events is defined by the optimz cycle time parameter. For
example, if optimiz target fill is 100%, optimz cycle fill is 85% and optimz cycle time is 30
minutes, then every 30 minutes the pump fill will briefly be reduced from 100% to 85%. This
feature is used to ensure that casing fluid level is at the pump.
A Cycle Mode test can be executed on demand by changing optimz cycle mode from
ENABLE to DISABLE to ENABLE.
Units: ENABLE or DISABLE
Default: DISABLE
15 optimz cycle fill
If optimz cycle mode is set to ENABLE, the Optimizer will periodically reduce the pump fill to
the optimz cycle fill value. The time period between these events is defined by the optimz
cycle time parameter. For example, if optimiz target fill is 100%, optimz cycle fill is 85%
and optimz cycle time is 30 minutes, then every 30 minutes the pump fill will briefly be
reduced from 100% to 85%. This feature is used to ensure that casing fluid level is at the
pump.
Units: percent
Min: 50
Max: 90
Default: 85
16 optimz cycle time
If optimz cycle mode is set to ENABLE, the Optimizer will periodically reduce the pump fill to
the optimz cycle fill value. The time period between these events is defined by the optimz
cycle time parameter. For example, if optimiz target fill is 100%, optimz cycle fill is 85%
and optimz cycle time is 30 minutes, then every 30 minutes the pump fill will briefly be
reduced from 100% to 85%. This feature is used to ensure that casing fluid level is at the
pump.
Units: minutes
Min: 1
Max: 240
Default: 20
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
56

17 up maximum spm
Units: spm
Min: up minimum spm
spm
18 up minimum spm
The minimum upstroke speed limit of the pump. Also serves as the overall minimum speed
Units: spm
Min: 1.0
Default: 2.5
19 down maximum spm
Units: spm
spm
20 down minimum spm
Units: spm
Min: 1.0
Default: 2.5
21 request spm
The current requested speed.
Units: spm
22 pump spm monitor
The speed of the pump averaged over one full stroke.
Units: spm
23 pump avg spm monitor
The speed of the pump averaged over ten strokes.
Units: spm
24 fluid flow monitor
stroking rate, updated once per stroke.
25 fluid avg flow monitor
stroking rate, averaged over the previous ten strokes.
26 optimizer id enable
Performs the Automated Optimizer ID Test.
Used as an aid to find optimal operating conditions, therefore assisting in the choosing of the
Optimizer Mode setup parameters. This automates the data collection necessary to make the
proper choices for the Optimize Mode set-up parametersso that the liquid fill monitor, pump
rate monitor and pump load monitor are maximized and gas interference is minimized and fluid
over pump monitor remains stable. This test can be run over a period of 1 hour to 7 days. It
will vary the request speed (from opt id max spm to opt id min spm) systematically during the
test period. It will log the optimize id data in the Event History during the test period. Once the
test is completed, this data can be uploaded from the Drive locally or remotely if equipped with
a radio or modem, and charted. Then the data can be analyzed so that the Optimizer setup
parameters can be properly be chosen. This eliminates guess work causing reduction in
production, especially in gassy wells.
Units: enum
27 opt id max test
The Automated Optimizer ID Test duration.
Units: hours
Min: 1
Max: 168 (7 days)
Default: 12
28 opt id max spm
The .maximum speed for the test.
Units: spm
29 opt id min spm
The .minimum speed for the test.
Units: spm
30 opt id req spm
The .current request speed for the test.
Visibility:
optimizer id enable is not disabled
Units: spm
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
57

31 opt id log time
The Automated Optimizer ID Test event log interval.
Visibility:
Units: mins
32 opt id time
The Automated Optimizer ID Test elapsed time.
Visibility:
Units: hours
33 opt id timer
The Automated Optimizer ID Test time remaining in test period.
Visibility:
Units: hours
35 menu visibility
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
58
6.10
Gearbox Menu
Table 6-9Gearbox Menu Parameters

pump direction
0
The direction of rod travel.
Units: enum
unit rated torque
1
The output torque rating of the gearbox, used to automatically set the snug auto min gearbox
torq and snug auto max gearbox torq parameters.
Units: in-lb
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 20,000
gearbox rated torque
2
A display value of the output torque rating of the gearbox, automatically set equal to the unit rtd
torque. This parameter is used to determine the gearbox friction, which affects the width of the
actual surface dynamometer plot.
Units: in-lb
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 20,000
crank torque monitor
3
A display of the instantaneous gearbox output torque.
Units: in*lb/Nm
peak up torque
4
The maximum gearbox output torque in the upstroke direction latched over the last stroke.
Units: in*lb/Nm
peak down torque
5
The maximum gearbox output torque in the downstroke direction latched over the last stroke.
Units: in*lb/Nm
calc gearbox efficiency
6
The calculated efficiency of the gearbox, including the rack-and-pinion. This value is measured
during normal operation. It is only valid when the unit is not coupled to the load, and the rotary
inertia is properly entered. This value can be transferred to the gearbox efficiency parameter
to ensure dynacard accuracy. Note that this value is affected by (scaled to) the gearbox rated
torque value.
Units: %
gearbox efficiency
7
The efficiency of the gearbox, including the rack-and-pinion. This parameter is used to
determine the gearbox friction, which affects the thickness of the actual surface dynamometer
plot. During normal operation and uncoupled from the rods and pump, this value is estimated
and displayed in the calc gearbox efficiency display. If desired, the calc gearbox efficiency
value can be transferred to the gearbox efficiency parameter.
Units: %
Min: 70
Max: 100
Default: 92
gearbox load factor
8
The gearbox load factor is used to compensate for the degredation in gearbox efficiency
associated with high gearbox loading. The gearbox efficiency is internally reduced by the
gearbox load factor percentage of the quantity of gearbox loading divided by the unit rtd
torque. For example, if the gearbox load equals unit rtd torque, the gearbox efficiency will be
internally reduced by gearbox load factor amount. The gearbox load factor value is roughly
5%, meaning the gearbox efficiency will drop 5% when the unit is running at rated load, and
2.5% when the unit is running at half of rated load.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 20
Default: 5
gearbox friction
9
A display of the calculated gearbox (plus rack-and-pinion) friction, as determined by the
gearbox rated torque and gearbox efficiency parameters. The gearbox friction affects the width
of the actual surface dynamometer plot.
Units: in*lb/Nm
10 gear ratio
The gearbox gear ratio. Note: Stroke ID and Well ID are required after gear ratio is changed.
Units: x:1
Min: 1
Max: none
Default: 25
11 motor max gearbox torq
A display of the theoretical maximum possible torque the motor is capable of producing at the
gearbox.
Units: in*lb/Nm
display
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
display
General Information
59
Table 6-9Gearbox Menu Parameters

12 gear crank troubleshooter
UNIT RTD TORQ IS 0
14 menu visibility
display
display
read/write
General Information
60
6.11
Pumping Unit Menu

Table 6-10Pumping Unit Menu Parameters

unit rtd torque
0
The output torque rating of the gearbox, used to automatically set the snug auto min gearbox
torq and snug auto max gearbox torq parameters.
Units: in-lb
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 20,000
unit rtd rod load
1
The rated lift of the pumping unit in lbs. This parameter is used by the Well Report.
Units: 100 lbs
Min: 0
Max: 9999
Default: 8,000
unit rtd stroke
2
The rated stroke length of the pumping unit (standard API convention). For example, a value of
32 corresponds to a 32 inch stroke. This parameter is used by the Well Report.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 999
Default: 32
stroke id length
3
The maximum mechanical travel (stroke limit) of the pumping unit measured from top hard
stop to bottom hard stop. This parameter is identified and automatically set during the Stroke
ID routine. The up position parameter value is subsequently limited to within 2 inches of the
stroke id length value (with the fully down position being zero). If stroke id enable is set to
OVERRIDE, then the strole id length must be manually entered consult factory for correct
value.
Recommended stroke id length values:
32 inch rated = 35 inches
56 inch rated = 56.5 inches
Units: inches
Min: none
Max: none
Default: 0
up position
4
The upper position to which the rod will travel (top of the stroke) during normal operation. The
up position maximum value is limited to within 2 inches of the stroke id length value. The up
position minimum value is limited to within the ref window tol of the upper reference sensor
position. Zero position is defined as fully down.
Units: inches
Min: upper ref position Max: stroke id length 2
Default: 0
down position
5
The lower position to which the rod will travel (bottom of the stroke) during normal operation.
The down position data entry value is limited to a minimum of 3.2 inches. Zero position is
defined as fully down.
Units: inches
Min: 3.2
Max: stroke id / 2 Default: 0
S rod stroke
6
A display of the rod stroke as determined by the up position and down position parameters
(S rod stroke equals up position minus down position).
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
linear lead
7
The linear movement per revolution of the gearbox output shaft, equal to the 3.14 times the
pinion diameter. Note: Stroke ID and Well ID are required after changing linear lead.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 12.566
park direction
8
The position to which the unit will park upon turning the motor off UPSTROKE or
DOWNSTROKE.
Value: UPSTROKE or DOWNSTROKE
Default: DOWNSTROKE
snug direction
9
The direction in which the unit will snug upon turning the motor on UPSTROKE or
DOWNSTROKE.
Value: UPSTROKE or DOWNSTROKE
Default: DOWNSTROKE
10 snug position
Upon turning the motor on, the unit will snug into the hard stop and the motor position will be
assigned to the snug position value. The snug position is typically zero, in the fully down
position.
Units: inches
Min: -200
Max: 400
Default: 0
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
61

11 snug torque limit
The percentage of full drive torque that is applied during initial snug down into the bottom
spring during Well ID and normal operation. If this value is too large, excessive spring
compression may result in pinion disengagement from the rack (causing a popping sound
during initial snug down).
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 8
12 snug air compensation
This parameter is used to enable snug down torque compensation for the air balance cylinders
on air balanced units. A value of 100% is theoretically correct for full compensation. Without
snug down torque compensation, the unit may not have sufficient snug torque to properly
reference to the snug position prior to normal run.
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 100
13 snug torque
A display of the final snug torque as a percentage of full drive torque, equal to snug torque
limit plus the necessary torque required to compensate for air balance pressure.
Units: percent
14 stroke id torq limit
The percentage of full drive torque that is applied during the Stroke ID test. Increase this value
if the unit does not fully extend to the top-stop and/or bottom-stop dring the Stroke ID.
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 12
15 snug tolerance
The accumulation of position error whereupon the snug routine will reference to drive to the
snug position.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 3
16 snug auto initiate
During normal operation, the unit will automatically initiate a snug reference every snug auto
initiate number of strokes. A value of zero disables the feature. This feature can be used to
automatically, periodically tag the pump.
Units: # of strokes
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
17 snug auto pos error
During normal operation, if the position error of the motor exceeds the expected position error
by the snug auto pos error amount, the unit will park with a POSITION FAULT. A POSITION
FAULT fault likely indicates a binding pumping unit or stuck pump. This value is automatically
set during the Well ID routine.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
18 snug auto vel error
During normal operation, if the velocity error of the motor exceeds the expected velocity error
by the snug auto vel error amount, the unit will park with a VELOCITY FAULT fault. A
VELOCITY FAULT likely indicates a binding pumping unit or stuck pump. This value is
automatically set during the Well ID routine.
Units: inches/s
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
19 snug auto max gearbox torque
During normal operation, if the crank torque monitor (gearbox torque) exceeds the snug auto
max gearbox torque, the unit will park with a GB TORQ FAULT fault. This parameter is
automatically set to 130% of the unit rated torque.
Units: in-lbs
Min: none
Max: none
Default: automatically set
20 snug auto min gearbox torque
During normal operation, if the crank torque monitor (gearbox torque) drops below the snug
auto max gearbox torque (usually a negative value), the unit will park with a GB TORQ FAULT
fault. This parameter is automatically set to minus 130% of the unit rated torque.
Units: in-lbs
Min: none
Max: none
21 ref input polarity
Used to set the polarity of the reference input. The reference input display value should be 1
(TRUE) when the sensor is blocked, and 0 (FALSE) when not blocked. The sensor should be
blocked at when the unit is near the top and bottom of stroke, and should be unblocked when
the unit is in mid-stroke. (If this is not the case, ref input polarity should be changed.) If the ref
input polarity is incorrect, the unit will display REF FAULT in the running status and REF
INPUT LOSS in the lrp status.
Units: NORMAL or INVERTED
Default: INVERTED
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
62

22 reference filter
The reference input must be TRUE for this number of consecutive fast clock inputs before the
controller will accept the signal as valid. If accepted as valid, the reference event will
correspond to the first clock at which the reference input went TRUE.
Units: fast clock counts
Min: 0
Max: 200
Default: 36
23 reference advance
A feed-forward term used to correct for time lag in the reference input from the sensor.
Units: fast clock counts
Min: 0
Max: 200
Default: 0
24 ref window tol
The motor position must be within +/- this tolerance of the reference position when the
reference input is received, otherwise the motor will snug and retry (and display a REF FAULT
or REF INPUT LOSS fault after 8 retry attempts). Similarily, the drive will fault off if the
reference input is not received within +/- ref window tol of the expected position.
Units: inches
Min: 0.5
Max: 3
Default: 2
25 ref position up
The upper reference position, where the reference sensor crosses the upstroke flag. This
value is automatically determined during the Well ID test.
Units: inches
Min: none
Max: none
Default: 0
26 ref position down
The lower reference position, where the reference sensor crosses the downstroke flag. This
value is automatically determined during the Well ID test.
Units: inches
Min: none
Max: none
Default: 0
27 meas ref position
The latched motor position when the reference input was received.
Units: inches
28 reference input
The state of the reference sensor input, connected to digital in 2 select LIMIT SWITCH. A
value of 1 indicates that the sensor is blocked; 0 is unblocked.
Units: 0 or 1
29 ref input count
A cumulative display of reference input edge counts.
Units: counts
30 ref event count
A cumulative display of actual (valid) reference events.
Units: counts
31 structural imbalance
The weight of the rack, entered as a negative value.
Units: pounds
Min: none
Max: none
Default: -160
32 API cntrweight value
The theoretically correct counterweight value for the given well makeup.
Units: lbs
33 meas cntrweight value
A display of the counterweight effect as determined by the drive during normal operation.
Units: lbs
34 counterweight value
The counterweight effect. This parameter is not visible (not required) if the unit has a pressure
sensors on the balance cylinder.
Units: lbs
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
35 air bal cylinder count
The number of air balance cylinders on the unit. Enter 0 if no air counterbalance exists.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 0
36 air bal diameter
The diameter of the air balance cylinder.
Units: inches
Min: 1
Max: 24
Default: 6
37 air bal cmprssn ratio
The compression ratio of the air counterbalance. This parameter is not visible (not required) if
the unit has a pressure sensors on the balance cylinder.
Units: x:1
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
63

38 air bal prs value
A display of the total air balance cylinder(s) pressure as measured by the pressure sensor.
Units: psi
39 air bal force value
A display of the total force produced by the counterbalance air cylinder(s).
Units: lbs
40 air pump cylinder count
The number of air pump (compressor) cylinders on the unit. Enter 0 if no air pump exists.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 0
41 air pump diameter
The diameter of the air pump cylinder.
Units: inches
Min: 1
Max: 24
Default: 2.5
42 air pump max pressure
The maximum pressure the air pump is capable of producing. This parameter is not visible (not
required) if the unit has a pressure sensors on the air pump cylinder.
Units: lbs
43 air pump prs value
A display of the total air pump cylinder(s) pressure as measured by the pressure sensor.
Units: psi
44 air pump force value
A display of the total force produced by the counterbalance air cylinder(s).
Units: lbs
45 calc rotary inertia
A display of the rotary inertia as calculated by the drive once per stroke during normal
operation. The unit must be uncoupled from the sucker rods and pump for this calculation to be
valid.
Units: in*lb*s^2
46 rotary inertia
The total rotary inertia reflected to the motor shaft (including the motor shaft inertia). This value
does not include the effect of sucker rods or downhole equipment. During startup, this value is
automatically identified during Well ID test. The rotary inertia value will affect the shape of the
dynacards during acceleration and deceleration.
Units: in*lb*s^2 Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0.37
47 rod load monitor
A display of the instantaneous rod load (force at the polished rod).
Units: lbs
48 rod position monitor
A display of the instantaneous rod position (at the polished rod). Typically, zero position is fully
down.
Units: lbs
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
read/write
display
display
General Information
64

49 lrp status
The current operating status of the unit, useful for troubleshooting if the unit is not behaving as
expected. Values include:
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
MOTOR OFF
NORMAL OPERATION
REF INPUT LOSS (or REF FAULT running status) The reference input was not received
within the expected ref window tol target window. The unit will immediately snug-up reference
and try again. This error will also occur if the ref input polarity setting is wrong; invert the ref
input polarity and try again. This fault may also indicate that Well ID is required (or was
faulty), or that system is at torque limit.. Re-run Well ID. This fault may also indicate that the
stroke id length value is too small, preventing the upper reference sensor from being
activated. This fault may also indicate a snug problem, where the unit did not extend
completely down during the snug down it may be necessary to increase the snug torque
limit. (This is especially true of air counterbalanced units, where snug air compensation may
be required.)
POSITION ERROR Controller has detected a "position error error" fault, usually indicative of
binding or torque limit. Torque limit may be due to operation above base speed. If no torque
limit or binding is observed, then increase snug auto pos error on the Pumping Unit Menu to
decrease the sensitivity of the fault.
VELOCITY ERROR Controller has detected a "velocity error error" fault, usually indicative of
binding or torque limit. Torque limit may be due to operation above base speed. If no torque
limit or binding is observed, then increase snug auto vel error on the Pumping Unit Menu to
decrease the sensitivity of the fault.
MAX GEARBOX TORQ Controller has detected a gearbox torque value exceeding the snug
auto max gearbox torq value.
MIN GEARBOX TORQ Controller has detected a gearbox torque value below the snug auto
min gearbox torq value (a negative value).
SNUG FAULT Unit did not snug to stop at the expected position. Check for mechanical
POWER LOSS The bus voltage dropped below the power loss bus level. Check bus
voltage and power loss bus level.
srp main state
A display of the application state machine "main state," useful in troubleshooting the unit.
srp sub state
A display of the application state machine "sub state," useful in troubleshooting the unit.
pump direction
A display of the direction the unit is moving UPSTROKE or DOWNSTROKE.
motor reference loss
A display of the health of the reference input NO LOSS or REF LOSS.
run req vel
A display of the current requested velocity.
rod velocity monitor
A display of the instantaneous polished rod velocity.
position error
A display of the current instantaneous position error.
max pos err err
A display of the maximum latched position error-error over the last stroke. This is the
difference between the actual position error and the expected position error. It may be useful in
setting the snug auto pos error parameter.
max vel err err
A display of the maximum latched velocity error-error over the last stroke. This is the difference
between the actual velocity error and the expected velocity error. It may be useful in setting the
snug auto vel error parameter.
min rod load
A display of the minimum latched rod load over the last stroke. This parameter may be useful
in setting the snug auto min load parameter.
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
General Information
65

60 max rod load
A display of the maximum latched rod load over the last stroke. This parameter may be useful
in setting the snug auto max load parameter.
61 min bus voltage
A display of the minimum latched bus voltage over the last stroke. This parameter may be
useful in setting the power loss bus level parameter.
62 pumping unit troubleshooter
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages for the Pumping Unit menu.
A value of NONE indicates that there are no items that currently need addressed.
64 menu visibility
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
66
6.12
Rod/Pump Menu
Table 6-11Rod/Pump Menu Parameters

pump depth
0
The depth of the down-hole pump measured vertically from the surface (TVD).
Units: ft/m (TVD) Min: 0
Max: 19999
Default: 0
average perf depth
1
The depth of the well casing perforations measured vertically from the surface to the mid point
of the perforations (TVD).
Max: 19999
Default: 0
tubing anchor depth
2
The position of the tubing anchor measured vertically from the surface. A value of zero
indicates no anchor.
Units: ft/m
Min: 0
Max: 19999
Default: 0
tubing outer diameter
3
The outside diameter of the tubing.
Units: inch/mm Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
casing inner diameter
4
The inside diameter of the casing.
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
tubing pressure source
5
The source of the tubing pressure input. Values include KEYPAD, ADC 1 ADC 11,
MODBUS MASTER.
Units: enum
tubing pressure
6
The pressure in the production tubing at the surface (at the well head). If the pumping unit is
producing up the casing, enter casing pressure here. If tubing pressure source = KEYPAD,
enter the value, otherwise value is read from the sensor.
Units: pressure units Min: 0
Max: 9999
Default: 0
casing pressure source
7
The source of the tubing pressure input. Values include KEYPAD, ADC 1 ADC 11,
MODBUS MASTER.
Units: enum
casing pressure
8
The pressure in the casing at the surface (at the well head). If the pumping unit is producing
up the tubing, enter tubing pressure here. If casing prs source = KEYPAD, enter the value,
otherwise value is read from the sensor.
Max: 9999
Default: 0
pump intake pressure
9
The pressure at the inlet of the pump as estimated by the drive.
Units: pressure units
10 pump discharge pressure
The pressure at the outlet of the pump as estimated by the drive.
11 pump differential pressure
The differential pressure across the pump as estimated by the drive -- equal to the pump
discharge pressure pump intake pressure.
12 plunger diameter
The diameter of the down-hole pump plunger. Note: This is NOT the same as "Pump Size,"
which is sometimes used to refer to the insert size of the tubing.
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
13 plunger length
The length of the plunger of the down-hole pump, used to estimate the pump leakage.
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
General Information
67

14 plunger clearance
The clearance distance between the pump barrel and plunger of the down-hole pump. This
value will be set to meas plunger clearance at the end of the Valve Check Test, and is used to
estimate the pump leakage.
Units: inch
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
15 plunger leakage
The estimated leakage or slippage in the down-hole pump averaged over the previous
stroke.
16 pump efficiency
The volumetric efficiency of the down-hole pump as determined by the production and leakage
rates. For example, if leakage is zero, pump efficiency is 100%. (This is not the overall
pumping efficiency value.)
Units: %
17 pump bottom spacing
The distance between the traveling valve and standing valve when the pump is at its lowest
position within the stroke. This parameter is used to simulate gas expansion at the start of the
upstroke.
Units: inches
Min: 0.0
Max: 100
Default: 4.0
18 rod sections
The number of rod sections to be entered. Values include: ONE, TWO, THREE, FOUR and
FIVE.
Units: enum
19 rod 1 type
The composition of the top section of the rod string (section #1). Values include: STEEL,
FIBERGLASS and COROD. The affect of couplers spaced 30 feet apart is automatically
included for STEEL and FIBERGLASS values.
Units: enum
20 coupler 1 type
The type of rod couplers used in rod section #1. Values include: STANDARD or SLIMHOLE.
Units: enum
21 rod 1 length
The length of the top section of the rod string (section #1).
Units: ft/m
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
22 rod 1 diameter
The diameter of the top section of the rod string (section #1).
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
23 rod 2 type
The composition of the second section of rod string from the top (section #2). Values include:
STEEL, FIBERGLASS and COROD. The affect of couplers spaced 30 feet apart is
automatically included for STEEL and FIBERGLASS values.
Visibility:
rod sections > ONE
Units: enum
24 coupler 2 type
Units: enum
25 rod 2 length
The length of the second section of rod string from the top (section #2).
Visibility:
rod sections > ONE
Units: ft/m
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
26 rod 2 diameter
The diameter of the second section of rod string from the top (section #2).
Visibility:
rod sections > ONE
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
27 rod 3 type
The composition of the third section of rod string from the top (section #3). Values include:
Visibility:
rod sections > TWO
Units: enum
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
68

28 coupler 3 type
Units: enum
29 rod 3 length
The length of the third section of rod string from the top (section #3).
Visibility:
rod sections > TWO
Units: ft/m
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
30 rod 3 diameter
The diameter of the third section of rod string from the top (section #3).
Visibility:
rod sections > TWO
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
31 rod 4 type
The composition of the fourth section of rod string from the top (section #4). Values include:
Visibility:
rod sections > THREE
Units: enum
32 coupler 4 type
Units: enum
33 rod 4 length
The length of the fourth section of rod string from the top (section #4).
Visibility:
Units: ft/m
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
34 rod 4 diameter
The diameter of the fourth section of rod string from the top (section #4).
Visibility:
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
35 rod 5 type
The composition of the bottom section of rod string (section #5). Values include: STEEL,
FIBERGLASS and COROD. The affect of couplers spaced 30 feet apart is automatically
included for STEEL and FIBERGLASS values.
Visibility:
rod sections > FOUR
Units: enum
36 coupler 5 type
Units: enum
37 rod 5 length
The length of the bottom section of rod string (section #5).
Visibility:
rod sections > FOUR
Units: ft/m
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
38 rod 5 diameter
The diameter of the bottom section of rod string (section #5).
Visibility:
rod sections > FOUR
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
39 rod weight offset
This value is used to manually adjust (offset) the rod weight, allowing compensation for nonstandard couplers, sinker bars, or other influences unaccounted for by the rod string data
entry.
Units: lb/kg
Min: -99999
Max: 99999
Default: 0
40 rod length
A display of the total rod length entered.
Units: ft/m
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 0.000
41 water cut
The water content of the fluid expressed as a percentage of volume.
Units: %
Min: 0.0
Max: 100.0
Default: 0.0
42 oil gravity
The density of the oil portion of the fluid in API units.
Units: API
Min: 0.0
Max: 30.0
Default: 0.0
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
General Information
69

43 water specific gravity
The specific gravity of the water portion of the fluid.
Units:
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 1.000
44 rod weight buoyant
The buoyant weight of the rod, derived from rod makeup and fluid characteristics.
Units: lb/kg
45 rod weight in air
The weight of the rod in air, derived from rod makeup.
Units: lb/kg
46 rod friction
The sliding (coulomb) friction of the sucker rods. This value will affect the thickness of the
actual downhole and predicted surface dynamometer plots as well as the stroke of the actual
downhole dynamometer plot. This value is automatically determined by the Well ID routine.
This parameter is different from stuff friction inasmuch as rod friction is distributed along the
rod string rather than localized at the surface. If auto rod friction enable is ENABLED, the
rod friction parameter will be internally limited to the minimum and maximum values dictated
by the dynamometer plot and given pump diameter and depth.
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 5000
Default: 300
47 rod frctn contrast
The rod frct contrast value allows rod friction compensation distribution to be modified.
Values range from 0 to 100%. At 0%, the rod friction is distributed evenly along the entire rod
string. This is suitable for straight, vertical wells, or for wells with gentle, deep deviations. With
rod frct contrast equal to100%, the rod friction is focused entirely at the surface. For wells
with highly located deviations (where most of the friction is closer to the surface), the rod frct
contrast will be a larger value.
Units: percent
Min: 0 Max: 100
Default: 0
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
stuff box friction

The stuffing box friction. This value will affect the thickness of the actual downhole and
predicted surface dynamometer plots. This parameter is different from rod friction inasmuch
as stuffing box friction is localized at the surface rather than distributed along the rod string.
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 2000
Default: 0
fluid viscosity
The viscosity of the fluid.
Units: centipoise Min: 0.0
Max: 100.0
Default: 100000.0
pump rate adjust
Used to adjust (offset) the fluid flow monitor display.
Max: 999999
Default: 0
fluid level calibrate
Used to calibrate fluid over pump monitor display. Enter the known value, in feet from the
surface, and fluid level offset will be determined.
Units: ft/m
Min: 0
Max: 999999
Default: 0
fluid level offset
Used to calibrate (offset) the fluid level monitor display.
Units: feet
Min: 0
Max: 999999
Default: 0
fluid level monitor
The fluid level in the well casing, measured from the surface. This value is derived from the
inferred fluid load on the pump.
Units: ft/m
The fluid level in the well casing, measured from the pump (sometimes abbreviated as FOP or
FLOP). This value is derived from the inferred fluid load on the pump.
Units: ft/m
fluid flow monitor
The estimated pump fluid flow averaged over the previous stroke. This value is derived from
the pump characteristics, API pump stroke, pump fill, and stroking rate.
The estimated pump fluid flow averaged over the previous ten strokes. This value is derived
from the pump characteristics, API pump stroke, pump fill, and stroking rate.
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
General Information
70

57 fluid production meter
Accumulated fluid production since the value was last reset. To rest this value, either enter 0
(zero), or set reset all meters to ENABLE. The meter rollover when it reaches 999999.
Units: volume units
58 tubing stretch
The estimated tubing stretch for the current running conditions.
Units: inch/mm
59 tubing stretch loss
The estimated production loss associated with the tubing stretch.
The estimated pump fluid flow averaged over the previous stroke. This value is derived from
the pump characteristics, API pump stroke, pump fill, and stroking rate.
The estimated pump fluid flow averaged over the previous ten strokes. This value is derived
from the pump characteristics, API pump stroke, pump fill, and stroking rate.
62 fluid production meter
Accumulated fluid production since the value was last reset. To rest this value, either enter 0
(zero), or set reset all meters to ENABLE. The meter rollover when it reaches 999999.
Units: volume units
63 API fluid load
The theoretical fluid load on the pump given the current operating characteristics (and the
current fluid level).
Units: lb/kg
The maximum theoretical fluid load on the pump given the current setup and zero fluid level
over the pump (FOP = 0).
Units: lb/kg
The fluid load on the pump averaged over the previous stroke, derived from the downhole
dynamometer plot.
Units: lb/kg
66 rod load monitor
The instantaneous load on the polished rod.
Units: lb/kg
67 minimum rod load
The minimum polished rod load observed during the previous stroke.
Units: lb/kg
68 maximum rod load
The maximum polished rod load observed during the previous stroke.
Units: lb/kg
69 max top rod stress
The latched peak stress in the top rod section (section #1) of the previous stroke.
Units: psi
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
General Information
71

70 rod pump troubleshooter
PUMP DEPTH IS 0
pump depth = 0
ROD LENGTH IS 0
rod length = 0
A ROD LENGTH IS 0
One sections rod length is 0
PLUNGER DIA IS 0
plunger diameter = 0
PUMP DEPTH POD LENGTH CONFLICT
pump depth > rod length
AVG PERF IS 0
avg perf depth = 0
TUBING OUTER IS 0
tubing outer diameter depth = 0
CASING INNER IS 0
casing inner diameter depth = 0
TUBING CASING DIA CONFLICT
casing inner diameter must be > tubing outer diameter
A ROD DIAMETER IS 0
plunger diameter = 0
PLUNGER LENGTH IS 0
plunger length = 0
72 menu visibility
display
display
read/write
General Information
72
6.13
Reservoir Menu
Table 6-12Reservoir Parameters

water cut
0
The water content of the fluid expressed as a percentage of volume.
Units: %
Min: 0.0
Max: 100.0
Default: 0.0
oil gravity
1
The density of the oil portion of the fluid in API units.
Units: API
Min: 0.0
Max: 30.0
Default: 0.0
water specific gravity
2
The specific gravity of the water portion of the fluid.
Units:
Min: 0.000
Max: 99.999
Default: 1.000
average perf depth
3
The location of the perforations measured from the surface to the mid point of the perforations
(TVD).
Max: 19999
Default: 0
reservoir pressure
4
The reservoir static pressure. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
Max: 99999
Default: 0
bubble point pressure
5
The bubble point pressure of the fluid. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
Max: 99999
Default: 0
well test pressure
6
The well flowing pressure at the time of the well test. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation
Mode.
Max: 99999
Default: 0
well test flow
7
The well inflow at the time of the well test. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
Units: flow units Min: 0
Max: 99999
Default: 0
IPR max flow perf
8
The inflow at the perforation when well flowing pressure is zero.
Units: flow units
9
IPR max flow pump
The flow into the pump when well flowing pressure is zero.
Units: flow units
10 IPR flow monitor
The well inflow associated with the current well flowing pressure.
Units: flow units
11 pump intake pressure
The pump intake pressure, estimated by the downhole pump dynacard load, casing pressure,
tubing pressure, and fluid density.
12 IPR pressure monitor
The well flowing pressure associated with the current operating conditions.
14 menu visibility
parameters.
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
73
6.14
Well ID Menu
Table 6-13Well ID Menu Parameters

well id number
0
The API well identification number.
Units: API
stroke id enable
1
Set to ENABLE and turn the motor on to initiate the Stroke ID test. See Quick Start Guide for
details. If Stroke ID can not be executed, stroke id enable must be set to OVERRIDE. The
stroke id length parameter must then be manually entered. Consult UNICO for correct value.
Units: ENABLE, DISABLE, or OVERRIDE
well id enable
2
Set to ENABLE and turn the motor on to initiate the Well ID routine. See Quick Start Guide for
details.
stroke id torq limit
3
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 12
snug torque limit
4
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 8
well id speed
5
The speed at which Well ID is performed (linear speed at the rod).
Units: inches/sec Min: 0.0
Max: 10
Default: 5
srp sub state
6
A display of the application state machine "sub state," useful in observing the progress of the
Stroke ID.
well ID state
7
A display of the the progress of the Well ID.
well ID status
8
A display of the the final status of the Well ID. See Quick Startup Guide for details.
stroke id length
9
The maximum mechanical travel of the unit, as determined during the Stroke ID test. If stroke
id enable is set to OVERRIDE, the stroke id length must be manually entered. Consult UNICO
for correct setting.
Units: inches/sec Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
10 up position
position minimum value is limited to within the ref window tol of the upper reference position
value. Zero position is defined as fully down. The up position is set automatically, upon
completion of the Stroke ID.
Units: inches
Min: uper ref position Max: stroke id length 2
Default: 0
11 down position
The down position value entry is limited to a minimum of 3.2 inches. Zero position is defined
as fully down. The down position is set automatically, upon completion of the Stroke ID.
Units: inches
Min: 3.2
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
General Information
74

12 S rod stroke
A display of the rod stroke as determined by the up position and down position parameters
(S rod stroke equals up position minus down position).
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 11
13 ref position up
The upper reference position, where the reference sensor crosses the upstroke flag. This value
is automatically determined by the Well ID routine.
Units: inches
Min: none
Max: none
Default: 0
14 ref position down
The lower reference position, where the reference sensor crosses the downstroke flag. This
value is automatically determined by the Well ID routine.
Units: inches
Min: none
Max: none
Default: 0
15 rod friction
The sliding (coulomb) friction of the sucker rods, including stuffing box effects. This value will
affect the thickness of the actual downhole and predicted surface dynamometer plots. This
value is automatically determined by the Well ID routine. If auto rod friction enable is
ENABLED, the rod friction parameter will be internally limited to the minimum and maximum
values dictated by the dynamometer plot and given pump diameter and depth.
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 5000
Default: 300
16 rotary inertia
The total rotary inertia of the pumping unit reflected to the motor shaft (including the motor
shaft inertia). This value does not include the inertia of sucker rods or downhole equipment.
This value is automatically identified during Well ID test. The rotary inertia value will affect the
shape of the dynacards during acceleration and deceleration.
Max: none
Default: 0.37
17 dynacard load offset
A parameter which can be used to manunally shift both the surface and downhole dynacards
vertically. This value is automatically determined by the Well ID routine. This value should
typically be set to zero, unless the measured surface rod load is known to be wrong. If it is
necessary to shift the downhole dynacard position (vertically), the rod makeup parameters
should be adjusted accordingly rather than adjusting the dynacard load offset.
Units: lbs
Min: 0.0
Max: 10
Default: 5
FAULT fault likely indicates a binding pumping unit, a stuck pump, or a torque limit caused by
operation above base speed. This value is automatically set during the Well ID routine.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
VELOCITY FAULT likely indicates a binding pumping unit, a stuck pump, or a torque limit
caused by operation above base speed. This value is automatically set during the Well ID
routine.
Units: inches/s
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
20 balance monitor
The pumping unit imbalance estimate, derived from average motor torque during the upstroke
versus downstroke. A positive value indicates the unit is overbalanced.
Units: in*lb/Nm or lbs/kg
21 balance action
The action needed to properly optimize the pumping unit's counterbalance, values include: well
id rqd, processing, add balance, reduce balance, move wt in, move wt out, wait fill, chart,
calibrate, cbalance ok. Refer to the Quick Start Checklist for more detail.
Units: enum
22 wi balance action
The action required to optimize the pump counterbalance that was identified during the Well ID
process. Values include: well id rqd, processing, add balance, reduce balance.
Units: enum
Default: no well id
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
display
General Information
75

23 well id date
The date of the last Well ID Test.
Units: yyyy.mmdd
24 well id time
The time of the last Well ID Test.
Units: hh.mm
25 well id troubleshooter
27 menu visibility
parameters.
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
76
6.15
DynaCard Menu
Table 6-14DynaCard Parameters

dead zone
0
The rod load does not update when the rod position is within the dead zone distance of the
ends of the stroke. This feature is used to eliminate any unusual dynacard rod load value
occurring at the turnaround.
Units: inch/mm Min: 0
Max: 15
Default: 0.5
surface filter
1
The dynacard filter cutoff frequency. Decreasing this value will increase the amount of
dynacard filtering.
Units: hertz
Min: 0
Max: 30
Default: 2
dynamic surface filter
2
If dynamic surface filter parameter is set to ENABLE, the dynacard filter (surface filter) cutoff
frequency will be automatically (internally) modulated as a function of speed, thereby providing
more filtering at low speeds and less filtering at high speeds. Dynamic filter modulation acts
upon the the base filter value defined by the surface filter parameter (modulation is
superimposed over the base surface filter value).
Default: ENABLE
predicted filter
3
The predicted dynacard generator filter cutoff frequency. Decreasing this value will increase
the amount of filtering.
Units: hertz
Min: 0
Max: 30
Default: 2.2
viscous frctn gain
4
The viscous friction gain for the embedded rod/pump model, used to generate predicted
dynacards. Adjusting this gain will affect the appearance of the predicted dynacard. A value of
1.000 yields the theoretically correct dynacard for the given setup data.
Units: gain
Min: -6553.000
Max: 6553.000 Default: 1.000
fluid cmprssn gain
5
The fluid stiffness gain for the embedded rod/pump model, used to generate predicted
1.000 yields the theoretically correct dynacard for the given setup data.
Units: gain
Min: -6553.000
Max: 6553.000 Default: 1.000
rod stiffness gain
6
The rod stiffness gain for the embedded rod/pump model, used to generate predicted and
measured downhole dynacards. Adjusting this gain will affect the appearance of the predicted
and measured downhole dynacard. A value of 1.000 yields the theoretically correct dynacard
for the given setup. data.Units: gain
Units: gain
Min: -6553.000
Max:
6553.000
Default: 1.000
rod mass gain
7
The rod mass gain for the embedded rod/pump model, used to generate predicted and
measured downhole dynacards. Adjusting this gain will affect the appearance of the predicted
and measured downhole dynacard. A value of 1.000 yields the theoretically correct dynacard
for the given setup.
Units: gain
Min: -6553.000
Max: 6553.000 Default: 1.000
rod damping gain
8
The rod damping gain for the embedded rod/pump model, used to generate predicted
1.000 yields the theoretically correct dynacard for the given setup.
Units: gain
Min: -6553.000
Max: 6553.000 Default: 1.000
flow frctn gain
9
The viscous flow line friction gain for the embedded rod/pump model, used to generate
predicted dynacards. Adjustments to this gain will affect the appearance of predicted surface
and downhole dynacards. Increase the value to increase the amount of simulated fluid flow
friction friction which will increase with speed. Fluid flow friction will be applied positively in
the upstroke, and negatively in the downstroke. Set to zero (normal case) for no flow line
friction. The user should run the pump throughout its entire speed range, and adjust this gain
until the predicted cards match the actual with respect to the flow friction load.
Units: gain
Min: -6553.000
Max: 6553.000 Default: 0.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
77

10 pump bottom spacing
The distance between the traveling valve and standing valve when the pump is at its lowest
position within the stroke. This parameter is used to simulate gas expansion at the start of the
upstroke.
Units: inches
Min: 0.0
Max: 100
Default: 4.0
11 rod weight offset
Used to manually raise or lower the downhole dynacard, causing the Inferred downhole
dynacard to rest approximately on 0 pounds.
Units: lb/kg
Min: -9999
Max: 9999
Default: 0
12 dynacard load offset
Used to manually raise or lower the dynacards. This parameter should only be used if a
dynacard load offset error has been proven.
Units: lb/kg
Min: -9999
Max: 9999
Default: 0
13 dynacard tilt offset
If necessary, adjust this value to tilt the surface dynacard. Increase value to raise the right
side. Decrease to lower the right side. This parameter should only be used if it is absolutely
necessary to artificially tilt the dynacard to establish proper pump fill reading.
Units: lb/kg
Min: -9999
Max: 9999
Default: 0
14 downhole tilt offset
If necessary, adjust this value to tilt the actual downhole dynacard. Increase value to raise the
right side. Decrease to lower the right side. This parameter should only be used if it is
absolutely necessary to artificially tilt the dynacard to establish proper pump fill reading.
Units: lb/kg
Min: -9999
Max: 9999
Default: 0
15 auto rod friction enable
If auto rod friction enable is ENABLED, the rod friction parameter will be internally limited to
the minimum and maximum values dictated by the dynamometer plot and given pump
diameter and depth. This feature will ensure that the downhole dynamometer plot is neither too
thick nor too thin. If flow frctn gain is non-zero, the auto rod friction feature will correctly
determine rod friction in the presence of the fluid friction. See auto rod friction and auto rod
frict offset.
Default: ENABLE
16 auto rod friction
A display of the rod friction value being applied when auto rod friction enable is ENABLED.
Units: lbs
17 auto rod frict offset
If auto rod friction enable is set to ENABLE, the auto rod frict offset parameter can be used
to manually adjust the amount of automatic rod friction compensation, in turn affecting the
thickness of the downhole dynamometer plot. (Increase the value to decrease the thickness of
the downhole dynamometer plot.).
Units: lb/kg
Min: -9999
Max: 9999
Default: 0
18 rod friction
The sliding (coulomb) friction of the sucker rods, excluding stuffing box effects. This value will
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 5000
Default: 300
Units: percent
Min: 0 Max: 100
Default: 0
20
stuffing box friction

The sliding (coulomb) friction of the stuffing box. This value will affect the thickness of the
actual downhole and predicted surface dynamometer plots.
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 5000
Default: 300
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
78

21 gearbox efficiency
The efficiency of the gearbox, including the rack-and-pinion. This parameter is used to
determine the gearbox friction, which affects the thickness of the actual surface dynamometer
plot. During normal operation and uncoupled from the rods and pump, this value is estimated
and displayed in the calc gearbox efficiency display. If desired, the calc gearbox efficiency
value can be transferred to the gearbox efficiency parameter.
Units: %
Min: 70
Max: 100
Default: 92
22 gearbox load factor
The gearbox load factor is used to compensate for the degredation in gearbox efficiency
associated with high gearbox loading. The gearbox efficiency is internally reduced by the
gearbox load factor percentage of the quantity of gearbox loading divided by the unit rtd
torque. For example, if the gearbox load equals unit rtd torque, the gearbox efficiency will be
internally reduced by gearbox load factor amount. The gearbox load factor value is roughly
5%, meaning the gearbox efficiency will drop 5% when the unit is running at rated load, and
2.5% when the unit is running at half of rated load.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 20
Default: 5
23 rotary inertia
does not include the effect of sucker rods or downhole equipment. During startup, the the
rotary inertia parameter is set during the Well ID. The rotary inertia value will affect the shape
of the dynacards during acceleration and deceleration.
The compression ratio of the air counterbalance. If this value is incorrect, the dynacards will be
tilted.
Units: x:1
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
The maximum theoretical fluid load exerted on the pump given zero feet of fluid over the pump
(and current fluid/pump parameter settings). This display may be helpful in selecting fill low
trigger and fill high trigger when fill source = PUMP LOAD and fill trigger mode = MANUAL.
Units: lb
The weight of the fluid being lifted by the pump, derived from the downhole pump
dynamometer plot.
Units: lb/kg
27 fluid over pump monitor
The fluid level in the well casing, measured from the pump (sometimes abbreviated as FOP or
FLOP). This value is derived from the inferred fluid load on the pump.
Units: ft/m
28 file state
The state of the file data storage system. Values include: ready, reading, writing, disk read
error, disk write error, no formatted data disk, disk write protected and module not installed.
Avoid removing SD-RAM Disk while file state = WRITING.
Units: enum
29 sampler dynacard samples
Used to select the size of the data set for each DynaCard the Data Sampler stores. The
smaller number of samples reduces data storage requirements. Values include: 50
SAMPLES, 100 SAMPLES and 200 SAMPLES.
Visibility:
file state < MODULE NOT INSTALLED
Units: enum
30 file on demand wpr
Enable to store the most current Well Production Report (WPR) into the Mass Data Storage.
Visibility:
Units: enum
31 file timed wpr
Select the time interval to store WPR into the Mass Data Storage.
Visibility:
Units: enum
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
General Information
79

33 menu visibility
read/write
General Information
80
6.16
Control Menu
Table 6-15Control Menu Parameters

bridle control enable
0
Used to enable the Bridle Separation Controller, providing a speed reduction when the rod load
drops below bridle rod load value.
Units: enum
bridle rod load
1
If bridle control enable is ENABLED, and rod load monitor drops below bridle rod load value,
the motor will slow to bridle sep adjust percentage of current speed. This will reduce the
violence of re-engagement of the "bridle."
Visibility:
bridle control enable = ENABLE
Units: lb/kg
Min: -999999
Max: 999999
Default: 0
bridle sep adjust
2
If bridle control enable is ENABLED, and rod load monitor drops below bridle rod load value,
the motor will slow to bridle sep adjust percentage of current speed. This will reduce the
violence of re-engagement of the "bridle."
Visibility:
bridle control enable = ENABLE
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 0
control troubleshooter
3
SEPARATION ADJ IS 0
Bridle Separation Controller not full set up.
SEP LIMIT FAULT DISABLED
Fault mask is off. The separation limit fault will not be
latched.
SEP ALARM EVENT DISABLED
Event mask is off. The separation alarm event will not
be latched.
SRP troubleshooter
4
menu visibility
5
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
General Information
81
6.17
Power Menu
Table 6-16Power Menu Parameters

input avg power monitor
0
The drive input power averaged over the previous stroke.
Units: hp/kw
regen avg power monitor
1
The drive regenerative power averaged over the previous stroke.
Units: hp/kw
output avg power monitor
2
The drive output power averaged over the previous stroke.
Units: hp/kw
motor avg power monitor
3
The motor output power averaged over the previous stroke.
Units: hp/kw
motor peak power monitor
4
The motor peak power latched during the previous stroke.
Units: hp/kw
rod avg power monitor
5
The polished rod power averaged over the previous stroke.
Units: hp/kw
input power meter
6
The cumulative input power consumed by the drive since the last reset of the parameter. This
value can be reset either by setting the value to zero, or by setting reset all meters parameter
to ENABLE.
Units: kwh
lift avg power monitor
7
The raw pump power required to lift the fluid to the surface, not including pump friction,
averaged over the previous stroke.
Units: hp/kw
lift efficiency
8
The ratio of the lift power to the input power, expressed as a percentage and averaged over
the previous stroke.
Units: %
reset power meter
9
Used to reset input power meter to zero.
Units: enum
10 db resistance
The resistance value of the dynamic braking resistor. Refer to the Tables section for
appropriate value.
Units: ohms
Min: 0
Max: 999999
Default: see Table
11 db watts
The wattage value of the dynamic braking resistor. Refer to the Tables section for appropriate
values.
Units: watts
Min: 0
Max: 9999
Default: see Table
12 db power
A display of the db watts parameter converted to HP.
Units: hp/kw
Min: 0
Max: 999999
13 db time constant
The thermal time constant of the dynamic brake resistor, used to set the time constant of the
dynamic brake fault.
Units: sec
Min: 0
Max: 60
Default: 25
14 max db resistor spm
An estimate of the maximum possible speed (SPM) the dynamic brake resistor can tolerate
without faulting off.
Units: SPM
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
82

15 db percent used
The percentage of available dynamic brake power (db watts) being used.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
16 min bus voltage
The minimum bus voltage detected over the previous stroke. This display is helpful in setting
the power loss bus level parameter.
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 999999
Default:
17 power loss bus level
The controller will assume input power is lost if the bus voltage drops below the power loss bus
level value. Upon detecting power loss, the unit will convert the motor into a generator and
park the unit under its own power. To disable the controlled power loss feature, set this value
to zero.
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 1000
Default: 460
18 power loss bus tol
The controller will assume input power is lost if the bus voltage drops below an averaged
rolling minimum bus voltage minus the power loss bus tol value. Upon detecting power loss,
the unit will convert the motor into a generator and park the unit under its own power. To
disable the power loss bus tol feature, set this value to 1000 (the power loss bus level control
will still be functional, however).
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 1000
Default: 100
19 power loss speed
The speed at which the unit will park upon detecting loss of power. This value must be large
enough to cause regeneration into the dynamic braking resistor while the unit is parking
(otherwise the unit will lose power).
Units: inches/sec
Min: 2
Max: 30
Default: 4
20 solar enable
Used to ENABLE or DISABLE the LRP solar powered voltage regulator. If solar enable is set
to ENABLE, the control will modulate the power level during the upstroke to maintain the solar
input voltage at the solar volt setpoint. .
ENABLE or DISABLE
Default: DISABLE
21 power limiting lrp
Used to ENABLE or DISABLE the LRP power limiting feature. The LRP power limiting feature
can be used to limit peak motoring power consumption, useful on generator powered
applications.
ENABLE or DISABLE
Default: DISABLE
22 motor power limit lrp
The motor power limit for the power limiting feature. The LRP control will limit the peak
motoring power consumption to this value. Set this value to the maximum desired power draw,
useful on generator powered applications. If solar enable is set to ENABLE, the motor power
limit lrp should be set to the solar panel maximum output power.
Units: hp/kw
Min: 0
Max: 500
Default: 50
23 solar sim power
If simulate mode and simulate drive are set to ENABLE, this parameter can be used to
simulate the power available from a solar panel. .
Units: hp/kw
Min: 0
Max: 500
Default: 0
24 solar volt setpoint
If solar enable is set to ENABLE, the control will modulate the power level during the upstroke
to maintain the solar input voltage at the solar volt setpoint. The solar volt setpoint should
be set to the solar panel optimal voltage the voltage setting whereupon the output power is
maximized. (If the voltage drops below the solar volt setpoint, the unit will slow down.) A PI
regulator provides the control.
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 1000
Default: 460
25 solar volt error
The difference between solar panel input voltage and solar volt setpoint. .
Units: volts
26 solar volt ki
The solar voltage regulator integral term. .
Units: gain
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 1
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
83

27 solar volt kp
The solar voltage regulator proportional term. .
Units: gain
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 12
28 solar state
A display of the current state of the solar voltage regulator.
SOLAR OFF Solar regulator not running
NO POWER REQ Power request is zero
SOLAR PWR LIMIT Power command is limited by the solar power source output capability
MOTOR PWR LIMIT Power command is limited to the motor power limit lrp parameter
SPM LIMIT Speed is limited by the requested run speed
PUMP FILL LIMIT Speed is limied by the Optimizer target pump fill
SOLAR PWR LOW Input voltage is less than the power loss bus level value.
29
30
31
32
solar power request

The power request (power limit) generated by the solar voltage regualtor.
Units: hp/kw
power troubleshooter
A rolling display of the Power menu troubleshooting messages. A value of NONE indicates
SRP troubleshooter
menu visibility
read/write
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
84
6.18
Generator Menu
Table 6-17Generator Menu

generator control
0
Three options are available for generator control.
Use DISABLE when a generator is not being used.
Use ENABLE SINGLE to cause the generator to turn off one minute after the LRP motor is
turned off.
Use CONTINUOUS to cause the generator to run indefinitely after the LRP motor is turned
off. .
Units: enum
generator flt input
1
Sets the logic polarity for the generator fault input (fault on open, fault on close).
Visibility:
generator control is not DISABLE
digital in 4 select = GEN FAULTED.
Units: enum
generator min spd
2
Sets the generator minimum speed; based on the governor calibration for 0.5vdc.
Units: rpm
Min: 1200
Max: generator max speed
Default: 1200
generator max spd
3
Sets the generator maximum speed; based on the governor calibration for 4.5vdc.
Units: rpm
Min: generator min speed
Max: 3600 Default: 2400
generator max pwr
4
Sets the maximum power that an integrated generator can supply at the generator max
speed. A non-zero value enables the drive to control the generator speed automatically,
based on the power demand. This must be set to the generator rated power. Set to zero to
enable setting of the generator spd req.
Units: hp/kw
Min: 0.00
Max: generator continuous limit Default: 0.00
generator pwr gain
5
Sets the generator power gain to control the load vs. speed calculation.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 75
generator spd ramp
6
Sets the generator speed ramp time.
Units: sec
Min: 0.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 1.000
generator spd req
7
Sets the generator request speed. This parameter is only functional in generator Auto mode.
In generator Hand mode, the engine runs at a fixed 1800 RPM.
Units: rpm Min: generator min spd Max: generator max spd Default: generator min spd
generator state
8
Displays the current generator control state.
ECU LOCKOUT (engine controller is locked out -- generator will not auto restart)
ECU OFF (engine controller is off)
ECU BOOT (engine controller is powering up)
CLEAR FAULT (controller is clearing the engine controller fault)
AWAIT GEN READY (waiting for the generator ready input from the engine controller)
CHARGING BUS (waiting to the bus to charge)
BUS CHARGED (bus is charged, now waiting for LRP motor on)
NORMAL RUN (normal running status).
Units: enum
generator diagnostic
9
Displays the current status of the generator controller.
NORMAL
FAULTED .
Units: enum
generator run hours
10
Displays the total run hours of the generator.
Units: hrs
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
General Information
85

generator maint hours
11
Displays the maintenance hours of the generator since the last reset.
Units: hrs
bus voltage
12
Current bus voltage.
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 800
running status
13
The current operating status of the unit, useful for troubleshooting if the unit is not behaving
as expected. Values include:
display
display
display
HAND RUNhand enable input is asserted. Auto-restarts off.

AUTO RUNauto enable input is asserted.
WELL ID RUNperforming Well ID Test
INCH FWDinch forward command is being performed.
INCH REVinch reverse command is being performed.
RESTART DELAYDrive has powered up, waiting for powerup restart delay to expire.
FAULT RESTARTAuto-restart feature is attempting to restart the system. Waiting for
restart timer to countdown to 0 (zero).
PUMP OFF WAITOptimizer Shut-Off (POC) Controller has stopped the pump. Waiting for
restart timer to expire.
TIMER WAITTimer Controller has stopped operation. Waiting for timer off time to expire.
CALENDAR WAITCalendar Controller has stopped operation. Waiting for the current date,
day, day-of-week and/or time-of-day to be within the allowable limits.
REMOTE STOPMotor turned off remotely (serially) .
PARKINGUnit is in the process of parking.
FAULTEDA fault condition currently exists. If Auto-restarts are enabled, the fault condition
may be automatically cleared when condition no longer exists. User must access the F/W
History in the Archive menu to view the offending fault (or upload the Events History using
Uedit).
MAX FAULTA fault condition exists and the maximum restart attempts has been
exhausted. Under this condition, the unit will no longer attempt to restart. Operator
intervention is required to reststart the pump. User must access the F/W History in the
Archive menu to view the offending fault (or upload the Events History using Uedit).
MOTOR OFFMotor is off. Operator intervention required.
DISABLEDThe run enable input is not asserted. Operator intervention required.
GEN FAULTA generator fault condition exists. Operator intervention required.
GEN STARTA generator start condition exists.
PARKEDThe unit is safely in the parked position.
POSITION FAULTThe unit has detected excessive velocity or position error. User must
access the F/W History in the Archive menu to view the offending fault (or upload the Events
History using Uedit).
GB TORQ FAULTThe unit has detected excessive gearbox torque. User must access the
F/W History in the Archive menu to view the offending fault (or upload the Events History
using Uedit).
SNUG FAULTThe motor never stopped turning while attempted to snug to the hard stop
upon turning the motor on. This likely indicates a mechanical problem possibly pinion
disengagement from rack or excessive counterbalance pressure. Try reducing snug torque
limit.
REF FAULTThe unit is either not seeing the reference sensor input, or seeing it at the
wrong position.
While running status is in the RESTART DELAY, FAULT RESTART, PUMP OFF WAIT,
REMOTE STOP, TIMER WAIT or CALENDAR WAIT state, standby sts will be set to TRUE.
If STANDBY is selected for one of the digital outputs the output will be asserted.
General Information
86

generator troubleshooter
14
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages for the generator menu. A
value of NONE indicates that there are no items that currently need addressed for this menu.
GEN RUN FAULT DISABLED
Gen run fault not enabled
GEN START FAULT DISABLED
Gen start fault not enabled
GEN WARNING DISABLED
Gen warning not enabled
GEN SDO EVENTS DISABLED
SDO default event, SDO single event, SDO dual
event and/or SDO optimize event not enabled.
SRP troubleshooter
15
menu visibility
16
display
display
read/write
General Information
87
6.19
Calendar Menu
Table 6-18Calendar Menu

drive current date
0
The drives current date as set on the calendar chip. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help
Display: Calendar.
Units: yyyy.mmdd
drive current day of week
1
The current day of week. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display: Calendar.
Units: enum
drive current month
2
The current month. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display: Calendar.
Units: enum
drive current day
3
The current day. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display: Calendar.
Units: decimal
daylight savings time
4
When changed to ENABLE, drive current time hours will increment by 1. When changed to
DISABLE, drive current time will decrement by 1.
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enable
Default: disable
drive current time
5
The drives current time as set on the calendar chip. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help
Display: Calendar.
Units: hh.mm
time of use limit
6
Enables the Time of Use limits by Calendar Controller. When enabled, operation can be
limited by month, date and/or day of week.
Units: enum
month start
7
The beginning month that operation is to be enabled. The value in month start can be greater
than the value in month end. A value of ALL in either month start or month end allows
operation in all months.
Visibility:
time of use limit = ENABLE
Units: enum
month end
8
The ending month that operation is to be enabled. The value in month start can be greater
than the value in month end. A value of ALL in either month start or month end allows
operation in all months.
Visibility:
Units: enum
day start
9
The beginning day of month that operation is to be enabled. The value in day start can be
greater than the value in day end. A value of ALL in either day start or day end allows
operation on all days of the month.
Visibility:
Units: enum
10 day end
The ending day that operation is to be enabled. The value in day start can be greater than the
value in day end. A value of ALL in either day start or day end allows operation on all days of
the month.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: 1
Max: ALL
Default: ALL
11 weekday start time
Sets the weekday start time. The value in weekday start time can be greater than weekday
end time for overnight operation. A value of 24.00 in either weekday start time or weekday end
time allows all day operation.
Visibility:
Units: hh.mm
Min: 0.00
Max: 24.00
Default: 24.00
display
display
display
display
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
88
Table 6-18Calendar Menu

12 weekday end time
Sets the weekday end time. The value in weekday start time can be greater than weekday end
time for overnight operation. A value of 24.00 in either weekday start time or weekday end
time allows all day operation.
Visibility:
Units: hh.mm
Min: 0.00
Max: 24.00
Default: 24.00
13 weekend start time
Sets the weekend start time. The value in weekend start time can be greater than weekend
end time for overnight operation. A value of 24.00 in either weekend start time or weekend
end time allows all day operation.
Visibility:
Units: hh.mm
Min: 0.00
Max: 24.00
Default: 24.00
14 weekend end time
Sets the weekend end time. The value in weekend start time can be greater than weekend
end time for overnight operation. A value of 24.00 in either weekend start time or weekend
end time allows all day operation.
Visibility:
Units: hh.mm
Min: 0.00
Max: 24.00
Default: 24.00
15 timer mode
Enables Timer Mode Operation. Timer Mode is a simple ON/OFF timer operation control. The
controller will alternately run for timer on time period, and stop for timer off time period. During
the ON period, the other control features such as Optimizer and Optimizer Shut-off control are
still functional.
Units: enum
16 timer on time
The amount of time of operation during the ON cycle. A value of 24.00 disables the OFF cycle.
Visibility:
timer mode = ENABLE
Units: hh.mm
Min: 0.00
Max: 24.00
17 timer on timer
The amount of time elapsed during the current ON cycle.
Visibility:
timer mode = ENABLE
Units: hh.mm
18 timer off time
The amount of time of operation during the OFF cycle. A value of 24.00 disables the ON cycle.
Visibility:
timer mode = ENABLE
Units: hh.mm
Min: 0.00
Max: 24.00
19 timer off timer
The amount of time elapsed during the current OFF cycle.
Visibility:
timer mode = ENABLE
Units: hh.mm
20 timer mode restart
Countdown until the next ON cycle.
Visibility:
timer mode = ENABLE
Units: mins
21 date range enable sts
Display of the Calendar and Timer Mode status. A value of OUT ON indicates that operation is
allowed under the current calendar limitations. A value of OUT OFF indicates that operation is
denied by the calendar settings.
Units: enum
23 menu visibility
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
89
6.20
EOP Enhanced Oil Production Controller Menu

Table 6-19EOP Menu

eop mode
0
Use DISABLE to disable the Enhanced Oil Production, EOP Controller.
Use ENABLE to start the Controller.
Use PAUSE to pause the Controller.
Use RESUME PHASE to resume the phase listed in eop state.
Use RESTART PHASE to restart the phase listed in eop state.
Units: enum
eop select
1
Use ALG ONE to select the pre-defined controller. Use ALG TWO to bypass the predefined
controller and use a user-defined UEdit Software Controller.
Visibility:
eop mode is not DISABLE
Units: enum
eop state
2
Used to select the current state of the controller. Also used to jump forward or backward to the
restart another state.
Visibility:
Units: enum
eop powerup mode
3
Used to control the recovery from a power loss. Use RESUME PHASE to resume the current
phase where it was prior to the power loss. Use RESTART PHASE to restart the current
phase.
Visibility:
Units: enum
eop status
4
Used to display the current status of the controller. Values include: DISABLED, PAUSED and
RUNNING.
Visibility:
Units: enum
eop pause start
5
The time at which the PAUSE state started.
Visibility:
eop mode is not DISABLE.
Units: hours
eop pause timer
6
The time elapsed since the PAUSE state started.
Visibility:
Units: hours
eop phase 0 time
7
The length of time for PHASE 0.
Visibility:
Units: hours
Min: 0.01
Max: 720.00
Default: 1.00
eop phase 0 timer
8
The elapsed time for PHASE 0.
Visibility:
Units: hours
eop phase 1 time
9
Visibility:
eop select is not ALG ONE
Units: hours
Min: 0.01
Max: 720.00
Default: 1.00
10 eop phase 1 timer
Visibility:
Units: hours
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
read/write
display
read/write
display
General Information
90
Table 6-19EOP Menu

11 eop phase 2 time
Visibility:
Units: days
Min: 0.01
Max: 365.00
Visibility:
Units: days
13 eop phase 2 dwell time
The delay between data access during PHASE 2.
Visibility:
Units: hours
Min: 0.01
Max: 720.00
14 eop phase 2 dwell timer
The elapsed time since data access for PHASE 2.
Visibility:
Units: hours
15 eop phase 2 settle time
The settle time after data access for PHASE 2.
Visibility:
Units: sec
Min: 0.000
Max: 1800.00
16 eop phase 2 settle timer
The elapsed settle time after data access for PHASE 2.
Visibility:
Units: sec
17 eop phase 3 time
Visibility:
Units: days
Min: 0.01
Max: 1095.00
Visibility:
Units: days
19 eop tubing min prs
The latched minimum eop tubing pressure.
Visibility:
Units: pressure units Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
20 eop tubing pressure
The latched copy of tubing prs value.
Visibility:
21 eop tubing max prs
The latched maximum eop tubing pressure.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
22 eop casing min prs
The latched minimum eop casing pressure.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
23 eop casing pressure
The latched copy of casing prs value.
Visibility:
24 eop casing max prs
The latched maximum eop casing pressure.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
read/write
Default: 1.00
display
read/write
Default: 1.00
display
read/write
Default: 10.000
display
read/write
Default: 30.00
display
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
91
Table 6-19EOP Menu

25 eop tubing temp
The latched copy of tubing temp value.
Visibility:
Units: F/C
26 eop casing temp
The latched copy of casing temp value.
Visibility:
Units: F/C
27 eop temp difference
The difference between eop tubing temp and eop casing temp .
Visibility:
Units: F/C
28 eop min temp diff
The latched minimum difference between eop tubing temp and eop casing temp .
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
29 eop mtd pressure
The latched eop casing pressure eop min temp dif.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
30 eop critical prs
The critical eop casing pressure to be maintained.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
31 eop point 1
The first latched eop casing pressure.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
32 eop point 2
The second latched eop casing pressure.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
33 eop point 3
The third latched eop casing pressure.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
34 eop prs accum
The eop casing pressure accumulator.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
35 eop temp accum
The eop casing temp accumulator.
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
36 eop prs increment
The pressure increments for the controller.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
37 eop valve min
The minimum pressure for the controller.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
38 eop valve setpoint
The current set-point pressure for the controller.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
39 eop valve max
The maximum pressure for the controller.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
92
Table 6-19EOP Menu

40 eop optimal prs
The optimal eop casing pressure to be maintained.
Visibility:
Default: 0.00
41 csg valve control
Use DISABLE to disable the Casing Valve Controller.
Use CYCLE for On/Off control mode (used for solenoid valve).
Use PULSED CYCLE for On/Off control mode (used for solenoid valve) where ON portion of
cycle is pulsed on/off.
Use PI HIGH REQ for servo valve command to DAC (used for servo valves, regulating at the
high pressure set-point.
Use PI LOW REQ for servo valve command to DAC (used for servo valves, regulating at the
low pressure set-point.
Use TEST for testing the valve.
Units: enum
42 csg valve test cmd
DAC Output
Command level to be output from the DAC, if dac x select = AL CSG VALVE CONTROL.
Digital Output
Command to be output from the digital output digital out x select = CASING VALVE OPEN or
CASING VALVE CLOSE. A value of 0 turns OFF the digital output. All other values turn ON
the digital output.
Visibility:
csg valve control = TEST
Units: volts
Min: 0.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 5.000
43 csg prs req source
Use KEYPAD to enter the value manually.
Use EOP to use the output from the EOP Controller.
Visibility:
csg valve control is not TEST
Units: enum
44 csg keypad low req
The lower pressure request set-point. When the pressure drops below this value, the valve will
turn off and pressure will build back up.
Visibility:
csg prs req source = KEYPAD
45 csg keypad high req
The higher pressure request set-point. When the pressure rises above this value, the valve will
turn on and pressure will bleed off.
Visibility:
csg prs req source = KEYPAD
46 csg valve kp
The proportional term for the PI control mode..
Visibility:
csg valve control is PI HIGH REQ or PI LOW REQ
Units: sec
Min: 0.000
Max: 1000.000 Default: 0.500
47 csg valve ki
The integral term for the PI control mode..
Visibility:
csg valve control is PI HIGH REQ or PI LOW REQ
Units: sec
Min: 0.000
Max: 1000.000 Default: 0.500
48 csg valve on pulse
The valve will pulse on/off during the on (release pressure) portion of the cycle. This value
defines the on time of the pulse.
Visibility:
csg valve control is PULSED CYCLE
Units: sec
Min: 0.000
Max: 1000.000 Default: 0.500
49 csg valve off pulse
The valve will pulse on/off during the on (release pressure) portion of the cycle. This value
defines the off time of the pulse.
Visibility:
csg valve control is PULSED CYCLE
Units: sec
Min: 0.000
Max: 1000.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
Default: 0.500
General Information
93
Table 6-19EOP Menu

50 csg valve pwm tol
The valve control dead band above and below the pressure set-point for CYCLE and PULSED
CYCLE valve control modes.
Visibility:
csg valve control is CYCLE or PULSED CYCLE
51 csg valve pwm level
The DAC output (if dac x select = AL CSG VALVE CONTROL) for CYCLE and PULSED
CYCLE. The output will cycle on/off as this level, set at a percentage of maximum.
Visibility:
csg valve control is CYCLE or PULSED CYCLE
Units: %
52 casing prs value
The pressure input from casing pressure source.
Visibility:
casing prs source is not KEYPAD
53 casing valve cmd
DAC Output
Command level to be output from the DAC, if dac x select = AL CSG VALVE CONTROL.
Digital Output
Command to be output from the digital output digital out x select = CASING VALVE OPEN or
CASING VALVE CLOSE. A value of 0 turns OFF the digital output. All other values turn ON
the digital output.
Visibility:
casing valve control = TEST
Units: volts
55 menu visibility
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
94
6.21
Fault/Event Menu
Table 6-20Fault/Event Menu Parameters

powerup restart delay.
0
Delay time between power up and the motor turning on. This can be used to sequence multiple
pumps on, preventing surging upon power up.
Units: mins
Min: 0.0
Max: 20.0
Default: 0.1
restart attempts
1
The number of times the drive will attempt to restart after it has stopped due to a fault
condition. To determine which faults may auto-restart, refer to the Troubleshooting Section.
Set this value to zero to prevent automatic restarts.
Units: decimal
Min: .0
Max: 99
Default: 50
restart counter
2
The number of times the drive has attempted to restart from the last fault. This value is reset to
zero once the drive has run for more than run verify time without a fault.
Visibility:
restart attempts > 0
Units: decimal
run verify time
3
The amount of time the drive must run without a fault before the restart counter will be reset to
zero.
Visibility:
Units: mins
Min: 0.0
Max: 99
Default: 5.0
fault restart delay
4
The delay time between restart attempts. (If the controller faults off, it will wait fault restart
delay time before attempting to restart.) If an individual restart delay parameter exists for a
fault, then that parameter is used.
Visibility:
Units: mins
Min: 0.0
Max: 999.9
Default: 10.0
restart min delay
5
The minimum amount of time the drive will wait before attempting a restart.
Visibility:
Units: mins
Min: 0.0
Max: 999.9
Default: 10.0
restart timer
6
Indicates the elapsed portion, if restarting, of restart time.
Units: mins
starting fault delay
7
The number of initial strokes of the pump to delay fault detection for low rod load fault, high rod
load fault, negative torq fault, high torque fault , low speed fault, high speed fault faults. This
allows for the system to start without nuisance faults.
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
snug auto max gearbox torq
8
During normal operation, if the crank torque monitor (gearbox torque) exceeds the snug auto
max gearbox torque, the unit will park with a GB TORQ FAULT fault. This parameter is
automatically set to 130% of the unit rated torque.
Units: in-lbs
Min: none
Max: none
snug auto min gearbox torq
9
During normal operation, if the crank torque monitor (gearbox torque) drops below the snug
auto max gearbox torque (usually a negative value), the unit will park with a GB TORQ FAULT
fault. This parameter is automatically set to minus 130% of the unit rated torque.
Units: in-lbs
Min: none
Max: none
FAULT fault likely indicates a binding pumping unit, a stuck pump, or a torque limit caused by
operation above base speed. This value is automatically set during the Well ID routine.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
General Information
95

VELOCITY FAULT likely indicates a binding pumping unit, a stuck pump, or a torque limit
caused by operation above base speed. This value is automatically set during the Well ID
routine.
Units: inches/s
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
12 low rod load mask.
Sets the mask level. Values include: FAULT, WARNING, EVENT and NONE. When set to
one value, the other masks will be cleared. When set to NONE, all masks will be cleared
Units: enum
Default: FAULT
13 low rod load fault
If the rod load falls below this value for low rod load violations consecutive strokes, a fault will
occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID and Valve Check Test.
Visibility:
low rod load mask is not set to NONE
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Default: -1000000
14 low rod load start
Delays the fault detection upon starting the pump. If this value is greater than 0, rod load
monitor must remain below low rod load fault for at least these many strokes after starting for
a fault to occur.
Visibility:
low rod load mask is a value other than NONE
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
15 low rod load strokes
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the low rod load violation must exist
for at least these many strokes before a fault will occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
16 low rod load state
Displays the state. Values include: LOAK OK and LOW LOAD.
Visibility:
Units: enum
17 low rod load violations
If the rod load falls below the low rod load fault value for low rod load violations consecutive
strokes, a fault will occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
18 low rod load restart delay
If this value is greater than 0.00 and restart attempts is greater than 0, the drive will allow AutoRestarts on this fault, and this value will be used for the fault restart delay
Visibility:
low rod load mask = FAULT
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
19 high rod load mask
one value, the other masks will be cleared. When set to NONE, all masks will be cleared.
Units: enum
Default: FAULT
20 high rod load fault
If the rod load rises above this value for high rod load violations consecutive strokes, a fault will
occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID and Valve Check Test.
Visibility:
high rod load mask is not set to NONE
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Default: 1000000
21 high rod load start
Delays the fault detection upon starting the pump. If this value is greater than 0, rod load
monitor must remain above high rod load fault for at least these many strokes after starting for
a fault to occur.
Visibility:
high rod load mask is a value other than NONE
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
96

22 high rod load strokes
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the high rod load violation must exist
for at least these many strokes before a fault will occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
23 high rod load state
Visibility:
Units: enum
24 high rod load violations
If the rod load rises above the high rod load fault value for high rod load violations consecutive
strokes, a fault will occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
25 high rod load restart delay
If this value is greater than 0.00 and restart attempts is greater than 0, the drive will allow AutoRestarts on this fault, and this value will be used for the fault restart delay.
Visibility:
high rod load mask = FAULT
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
26 rod load span mask
Units: enum
Default: WARNING
27 rod load span
Displays the differentialspanbetween the latched maximum rod load and the latched
minimum rod load.
Units: lb/kg
28 rod load span fault
If rod load span falls below this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID
and Valve Check Test.
Visibility:
rod load span mask is not set to NONE
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Default: 1000000
29 rod load span start
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, rod load span must remain below rod
load span fault for at least these many strokes after starting for a fault to occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
30 rod load span strokes
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, rod load span must remain below rod
load span fault for at least these many strokes for a fault to occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
31 rod load span state
Visibility:
Units: enum
32 rod load span violations
Counter leading up to the fault detection. Once this value is equal to, rod load span strokes a
fault will occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
33 rod load span restart delay
Visibility:
rod load span mask = FAULT
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
97

34 low pump load mask
Units: enum
Default: WARNING
The weight of the fluid being lifted by the pump derived from the polished rod load and buoyant
rod weight.
Units: lb/kg
36 low pump load fault
If pump load monitor falls below this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the
Well ID and Valve Check Test.
Visibility:
low pump load mask is not set to NONE
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Default: 1000000
37 low pump load start
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, pump load monitor must remain
below low pump load fault for at least these many strokes after starting for a fault to occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
38 low pump load strokes
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, pump load monitor must remain
below low pump load fault for at least these many strokes for a fault to occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
39 low pump load state
Visibility:
Units: enum
40 low pump load violations
Counter leading up to the fault detection. Once this value is equal to, low pump load strokes a
fault will occur.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 0
41 low pump load restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
42 negative torq mask
Units: enum
Default: FAULT
43 negative torq fault
If the torque falls below this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID
Visibility:
negative torq mask is not set to NONE
Units: % max
Min: 0.00
Default: -100.00
44 negative torq fault time
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the torque must remain below
negative torq fault for at least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility:
negative torq mask is not set to NONE
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
45 negative torq restart delay
Visibility:
negative torq mask = FAULT
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
General Information
98

46 high torq mask
Units: enum
Default: FAULT
47 high torq fault
If the torque rises above this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID
Visibility:
high torq mask is not set to NONE
Units: % max
Min: 0.00
Default: 100.00
48 high torq fault time
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the torque must remain above high
torq fault for at least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility:
high torq mask is not set to NONE
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
49 high torq restart delay
Visibility:
high torq mask = FAULT
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
50 low speed mask
Units: enum
Default: FAULT
51 low speed fault
If the speed falls below this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID
Visibility:
low speed mask is not set to NONE
Units: rpm
Min: 0.0 Default: 0.0
52 low speed fault time
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the speed must remain below low
speed fault for at least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility:
low speed mask is not set to NONE
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
53 low speed restart delay
Visibility:
low speed mask = FAULT
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
54 high speed mask
Units: enum
Default: FAULT
55 high speed fault
If the speed rises above this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID
Visibility:
high speed mask is not set to NONE
Units: rpm
Min: 0.0 Default: MAX[motor max rpm * 150%, base rpm *200%]
56 high speed fault time
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the speed must remain above high
speed fault for at least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility:
high speed mask is not set to NONE
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
57 high speed restart delay
Visibility:
high speed mask = FAULT
Units: mins
Min: 0.00
Default: 0.00
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
99

58 timed event 1 mask
Units: enum
Default: WARNING
59 timed event 1 select
Select TIMED to use timed event 1 time for the data latching interval. Select STROKES to use
timed event 1 strokes for the data latching interval.
Visibility:
timed event 1 mask is not set to NONE
Units: enum
60 timed event 1 time
The amount of time between latching the timed event.
Visibility:
Units: mins
Min: 0.01
Max: 1440.00
Default: 60.00
61 timed event 1 strokes
The number of strokes between latching the timed event.
Visibility:
Units: strokes
Min: 0
Default: 1000
62 lockout status
The current password lockout state by level of password access.
Units: enum
Min: unlocked
Max: level 3
Default: unlocked
64 menu visibility
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
100
6.22
Motor Menu
Table 6-21Motor Menu Parameters

synchronous motor
0
Motor type. Set to DISABLE for induction motor, and ENABLE for synchronous motor. Used by
AC Test Utility.
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enabled
Default: disable
motor poles
1
Number of motor poles.
Default: 4
base rpm
2
The nameplate rated speed of the motor.
Units: rpm
Min: 0
Max: 3600
Default: 1750
motor max rpm
3
The maximum desired speed of the motor.
Units: rpm
Min: 0
Max: 3600
Default: 2400
max possible spm
4
The maximum SPM the unit is capable of running given the current settings.
Units: strokes per minute
max db resistor spm
5
An estimate of the maximum possible speed (SPM) the dynamic brake resistor can tolerate
without faulting off.
Units: SPM
motor rated frequency
6
The motor base frequency, given on the nameplate.
Units: hertz
Min: 0
Default: 60
motor rtd power
7
The motor nameplate rated power.
Units: hp/kw
Min: 0
Default: 0
motor rated voltage
8
The motor nameplate rated voltage.
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 1000
Default: 460
motor rated current
9
The motor nameplate rated current.
Units: amps rms Min: 0
Max: maximum current
Default: 0
10 motor rms limit
If the motor thermal RMS exceeds the motor rms limit, the motor will fault off with an RMS fault.
This value is typically set to the motor nameplate rated current. Set this value to zero to disable
the motor RMS fault check.
Default: 0
11 slip frequency
The slip frequency of the motor at maximum output current. This value is the difference
between the command frequency to the motor and its shaft frequency. Determined during AC
Test Utility. For transducer-less (vector source = XLESS) AC operation the slip frequency is
computed as the difference between the motors synchronous speed and its base rpm,
expressed in hertz.
Visibility:
Visible if the motor is an AC induction motor.
Units: hertz
Min: 0
Max: 9.999
Default: 0
12 field current
The current used to establish the field in the induction motor. Determined during AC Test
Utility. This setup is normally 1/4 to 1/3 of the motor rated current. This value must be set
manually for a DC motor if the drive is being used to supply the dc field current in addition to
the armature current.
Visibility:
Visible if the motor is a AC motor and correct drive ID.
Max: 999.99
Default: 0
13 motor inertia
The inertia of the motor armature as determined by System ID test.
Units: ftlbs^2/kgm^2 Min: 0
Default:0.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
101
Table 6-21Motor Menu Parameters

14 motor max power
The maximum power of the motor as determined during AC Test Utility.
Units: hp/kw
Min: 0
Max: 999.99
Default: 0
15 motor rtd torque
The rated torque of the motor. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Units: ftlb/Nm
Min: 0
Max: 9999.99
Default: 0
16 motor max torque
The maximum torque of the motor. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Units: in*lb/Nm Min: 0
Max: 9999.99
Default: 0
17 motor max torque inlb
The maximum torque of the motor in inch-lbs. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Max: 9999.99
Default: 0
The maximum torque the motor is capable of producing at the gearbox output shaft.
Determined during AC Test Utility.
Max: 9999.99
Default: 0
19 motor max lift
The maximum lift force the motor is capable of producing at the polished rod, as determined by
the motor max torque and the gearbox gear ratio.
Units: lb/N
20 motor thermal RMS
A display of the motor RMS current level.
Units: amps rms
21 motor rpm
A display of the current motor speed.
Units: rpm
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
display
General Information
102
6.23
Drive Menu
Table 6-22Drive Menu Parameters

software number
0
Used to identify the application software that is installed.
revision number
1
Used to identify the application software revision that is installed.
drive model
2
The drive model number. Values include: 1100, 1105, 1110, 1200 and 1230. Used to set up
drive model dependant parameter defaults.
Units: enum
switch frequency
3
The frequency at which the IGBT's switch on and off.
For modulation select=DIGITAL, enter an appropriate value as per the Table in the Tables
section.
For modulation select=SPACE VECTOR, use 3600.
Units: hertz
Min: 1000
Max: Calculated
vector source
4
The vector controller source. Set to XLESS for normal operation.
upid motor source
5
The upid feedback source. Set to XLESS for normal operation.
upid load source
6
The upid load feedback source. Set to XLESS for normal operation.
motor fbk size
7
The resolution of the motor feedback device. Set to 2048 for normal operation.
synchronous motor
8
Motor type. Set to DISABLE for induction motor, and ENABLE for synchronous motor. Used by
AC Test Utility.
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enabled
Default: disable
maximum current
9
The peak output rating of the inverter.
Max: Max Inverter Current
Default: 0
10 current limit
The inverter output current is limited to this value.
Max: Max Inverter Current
Default: 0
11 motor rms limit
If the motor thermal RMS exceeds the motor rms limit, the motor will fault off with an RMS
fault. This value is typically set to the motor nameplate rated current. Set this value to zero to
disable the motor RMS fault check.
Default: 0
12 motor thermal rms
Readout of motor rms current with a 5-minute time constant.
Units: amps rms
13 motor current
Readout of near instantaneous motor rms current.
Units: amps rms
14 torque limit
The inverter output torque is limited to this value, expressed as a percentage of maximum
torque.
Units: % max
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 100
15 torque invert
Inverts the direction of the motor. This is equivalent to swapping the motor leads in hardware.
Units: enum
16 base rpm
Units: rpm
Min: 0
Max: 3600
Default: 1750
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
103

17 motor max rpm
Units: rpm
Min: 0
Max: 3600
Default: 2400
18 brake motor on delay
Delay between brake disengagement and motion command. This allows time for the brake to
disengage before motion is commanded. The motor will hold position during the delay time.
Units: sec
Min: 0
Max: 1
Default: 0.2
19 accel time
The time to accelerate the drive from zero to motor max rpm.
Units: sec
Min: 0.1
Max: 10
Default: 0.75
20 decel time
The time to decelerate the drive from motor max rpm to zero.
Units: sec
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 0.75
21 jerk time
The time allotted to soften the change in acceleration.
Units: sec
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 0.75
22 settle time
The dwell time after the drive commands to a stop and before reversing direction.
Units: sec
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 0
23 max possible SPM
parameters.
24 system order
Set to PI VELOCITY on LRP.
25 system gain
The overall gain of the system. Determined during System ID Test and non-moving AC Test.
Units: 1/sec/sec Min: 0
Max: 999.999
Default: 0.000
26 system wn
The natural frequency of the drive closed loop velocity controller.
Units: rad/sec
Min: 0
Max: 99.9
Default: 0
27 slip frequency
Determined during AC Test.
Units: Hz
28 field current
Determined during AC Test. Typically equal to 25% to 35% of motor rated current.
Units: amps
29 stator resistance Rs
Units: Ohms
30 leakage Sigma Ls
Units: henries
31 Lm squared over Lr
Units: henries
32 flux cutoff min
Units: rad/sec
33 motor inertia
Units: ft-lbs-s^2
34 motor max power
Units: hp
35 motor rtd torque
Units: ft-lb
36 motor max torque
Units: ft-lb
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
display
General Information
104

37 motor max torque inlb
The maximum torque of the motor in inch-lbs. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Max: 9999.99
Default: 0
The maximum torque the motor is capable of producing at the gearbox output shaft.
Determined during AC Test Utility.
Max: 9999.99
Default: 0
39 drv motor troubleshooter
NO RUN ENABLE INPUT
Check wiring to the STANDBY/RUN selector.
NO MOTOR ON INPUT
Check wiring to the STANDBY/RUN selector.
REMOTE RUN DISABLED
Check remote run enable parameter.
41 menu visibility
display
display
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
105
6.24
Drive Reg Menu

Table 6-23Drive Reg Menu Parameters

drive model
0
Units: enum
clock frequency
1
The frequency of the slowest control loops in the drive. Clock frequencies are determined at
power-up, so if this item is changed, control power to the drive must be cycled. For most
applications the default value is sufficient.
Visibility:
menu visibility = MAXIMIZE
Units: hertz
drive multiple
2
Drive multiple sets the frequency of all the routines which execute on the drive clock. The drive
controller is the main routine which runs on the drive clock. If the clock frequency is at 50 Hz
and the drive multiple is a 5, the drive clock runs at 50 * 5 = 250 Hz. Clock frequencies are
determined at power-up, so if this item is changed, control power to the drive must be reset.
For most applications the default value is sufficient.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
upid multiple
3
The position/velocity loop controller runs on the upid clock by this multiple. If the drive clock is
at 250 Hz and the upid multiple is a 4, the upid clock runs at 250 * 4 = 1000 Hz. Clock
frequencies are determined at power-up, so if this item is changed, control power to the drive
must be reset. For most applications the default value is sufficient.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
ac multiple
4
The ac vector controller runs on the ac clock. This clock runs faster than the upid clock by this
multiple. If the upid clock is at 500 Hz and this multiple is a 2, the ac clock runs at 500 * 2 =
1000 Hz. Clock frequencies are determined at power-up, so if this item is changed, control
power to the drive must be reset. For most applications the default value is sufficient.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
ac fast multiple
5
The ac vector rotator runs on the ac fast clock. This clock runs faster than the ac clock by this
multiple. If the ac clock is at 1000 Hz and this multiple is a 2, the ac clock runs at 1000 * 2 =
2000 Hz. Clock frequencies are determined at power-up, so if this item is changed, control
power to the drive must be reset. For most applications the default value is sufficient.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
vector source
6
Source of the motor position feedback.
Visibility:
simulate drive = ENABLE
Units: enum
Min: motor socket
Max: xless
Default: xless
upid motor source
7
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: motor socket
Max: xless
Default: xless
upid load source
8
Source of the load position feedback.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: motor socket
Max: xless
Default: xless
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
106

motor fbk size
9
Enter the pulses per revolution of the motor position feedback device. NA for XLESS mode.
Visibility:
Units: pulses
Min: 0
Max:
Default: 2048
10 motor fbk invert
Inverts the direction of the feedback. This is equivalent to swapping the leads in hardware.
Visibility:
Units: enable
11 modulation select
This item selects the type of current modulation to be used by the drive. The standard choice
is DIGITAL, meaning that the digital current regulator module is installed and used for current
modulation. Additional documentation may be obtained from Unico regarding the other options
for current modulation. Note: The drive requires that the motor be off when changing the type
of current regulation.
Visibility:
Units: enum
12 modulation state
Modulation state readout indicates the shape of the fundamental voltage waveform. The
modulation state can be used as a quick check of the voltage headroom of the
inverter/converter. For Trap and Six Step states, pulse dropping is occurring indicating lack of
available bus voltage headroom to produce sinusoidal fundamental voltage output.
Visibility:
modulation select is not DIGITAL
Units: enum
13 modulation index
The modulation index readout is the ratio of fundamental inverter/converter output line to bus
midpoint voltage divided by bus voltage over 2. Modulation index is calculated with feedback
line and bus voltages and so represents the actual delivered modulation index. It can be used
as a quick check of the voltage headroom of the inverter/converter. For values of modulation
index greater than 1.15 pulse dropping is occurring indication lack of available bus voltage
headroom to produce sinusoidal fundamental voltage output.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
14 switch frequency
The frequency at which the IGBT's switch on and off.
For modulation select=DIGITAL, enter an appropriate value as per the Table in the Tables
section. For modulation select=SPACE VECTOR, use 3600.
Units: hertz
Min: 1000
Max: Calculated Default: Error! Reference source
not found.
15 switch freq mode
This parameter sets the switching frequency selection to manual or auto. When set to MAN
ADJUST, the switching frequency of the IGBTs is set to the setup value switch frequency.
When set to AUTO CHANGE, the switching frequency used is the setup value in switch
frequency, but as the drive heats up thermally, the switching frequency is lowered to help
reduce the drive thermal output. This reduces the chance for faults and allows the drive to run
for an extended period without faulting. As the drive cools, the switching frequency is returned
to the set point. The AUTO CHANGE feature will reduce the drive responsiveness needed
under demanding torque applications.
Visibility:
Units: enum
16 thermal protection
This item is only functional when modulation select is set to VOLTAGE BLOCK. If this item is
enabled, the thermal protection algorithm used will take advantage of voltage blocking
modulation.
Visibility:
Units: enum
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
107

17 dsv synchronized
This item is only functional when modulation select is set to VOLTAGE BLOCK. If this item is
enabled, the thermal protection algorithm used will take advantage of voltage blocking
modulation.
Visibility:
Units: enum
18 dsv kv percent
Sets the percent of motor rated voltage to use for the emf vector feed-forward in space vector
mode.
Visibility:
modulation select as necessary
Units: %
Min: 0.00
Max: 100.00
Default: 85%
19 dsv L linking
This item determines if dsv Lq and dsv Ld should be linked to the setup for leakage sigma Ls.
Normally this item should be enabled so leakage sigma Ls is always copied into dsv Lq and
dsv Ld. If dsv Lq or dsv Ld are not equivalent this item should be disabled and the
inductances should be manually entered.
Visibility:
Units: enum
20 dsv Ld
The d axis induction of the motor. This is automatically set by the INDUCTANCE test of the
"AC Test" routines if dsv L linking is enabled otherwise it can be set manually if dsv L linking is
disabled.
Visibility:
Units: henries
Min: 0.000000
Default: 0.000000
21 dsv Lq
The q axis induction of the motor. This is automatically set by the INDUCTANCE test of the
"AC Test" routines if dsv L linking is enabled otherwise it can be set manually if dsv L linking is
disabled.
Visibility:
Units: henries
Min: 0.000000
Default: 0.000000
22 dsv wn d
This item sets the bandwidth response of the space vector D axis current loop. NOTE: If this
item is set to zero the individual gains may be manually adjusted. The typical range of values
for an AC motor is 200 - 1000.
Visibility:
torq reg select as necessary
Units: rad/sec
Min: 0.0
Default: 200.00
23 dsv wn q
This item sets the bandwidth response of the space vector Q axis current loop. NOTE: If this
item is set to zero the individual gains may be manually adjusted. The typical range of values
for an AC motor is 200 - 1000.
Visibility:
Units: rad/sec
Min: 0.0
Default: 200.00
24 dsv kp cmd pct d
Sets the D axis feed forward gain (dsv kp cmd d) as a percentage of the feedback gain (dsv kp
fbk d). A value of 100% yields traditional PI tuning
Visibility:
Units: %
Min: 0
Default: 100
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
108

25 dsv kp cmd pct q
Sets the D axis feed forward gain (dsv kp cmd d) as a percentage of the feedback gain (dsv kp
fbk q). A value of 100% yields traditional PI tuning
Visibility:
Units: %
Min: 0
Default: 100
26 dsv kp cmd d
Sets the feed forward gain for the synchronous frame D axis PI regulators used in space vector
mode. Typically this value is determined by the percentage set in dsv kp cmd pct d. It may
however, be set directly causing the percent to be back calculated.
Visibility:
Units: gain
Min: 0.000
Default: 0.000
27 dsv kp cmd q
Sets the feed forward gain for the synchronous frame Q axis PI regulators used in space vector
mode. Typically this value is determined by the percentage set in dsv kp cmd pct q. It may
however, be set directly causing the percent to be back calculated.
Visibility:
Units: gain
Min: 0.000
Default: 0.000
28 dsv ki err d
Sets the integral gain for the synchronous frame D axis PI regulators used in space vector
mode. This gain is automatically calculated based on the value of dsv wn d.
Visibility:
Units: gain
Min: 0.000
Default: 0.000
29 dsv ki err q
Sets the integral gain for the synchronous frame Q axis PI regulators used in space vector
mode. This gain is automatically calculated based on the value of dsv wn d.
Visibility:
Units: gain
Min: 0.000
Default: 0.000
30 dsv kp fbk d
Sets the proportional feedback gain for the synchronous frame D axis PI regulators used in
space vector mode. This gain is automatically calculated based on the value of dsv wn d.
Visibility:
Units: gain
Min: 0.000
Default: 0.000
31 dsv kp fbk q
Sets the proportional feedback gain for the synchronous frame Q axis PI regulators used in
space vector mode. This gain is automatically calculated based on the value of dsv wn q.
Visibility:
Units: gain
Min: 0.000
Default: 0.000
32 dsv deadtime percent
Sets the percentage of the ideal dead-time compensation to use for digital space vector
control. This percentage is typically less than 100% because of the interaction with the integral
gain.
Visibility:
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 25
33 dsv v limit percent
Sets the commanded voltage limit for digital space vector control. The default of 100%
represents the hexagon constraint. This setup allows the command to exceed this constraint
thus producing non-sinusoidal voltages.
Visibility:
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 25
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
109

34 dsv v boost
This item will set the starting voltage boost.
Visibility:
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 25
35 dsv v boost cutoff
This item will set the cutoff frequency for the voltage boost.
Visibility:
Units: hertz
Min: 0
Max: 60
Default: 15
36 dsv bus correction
This item will adjust the dsv control in order to stabilize the bus.
Visibility:
Units: hertz
Min: 0
Max: 60
Default: 15
37 dsv vbus filter
This item is the time constant of the first order filter used to stabilize the bus.
Visibility:
Units: sec
Min: 0
Default: 1
38 dsv s frame offset
Dsv s frame offset is added to a predetermined offset required when converting the current
feedback from stationary to synchronous frame.
Visibility:
Units: usec
Min: 0
Default: 0
39 bus voltage.
Current bus voltage
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 800
40 br phase loss enable
Enable to allow bus ripple phase-loss detection.
Units: enum
41 pl rip current
Displays the actual ripple current.
Visibility:
Units: amps
42 pl filtered current
Displays the filtered ripple current.
Visibility:
Units: amps
43 pl trip current
The phase-loss trip level. Consult factory prior to adjusting default values.
Visibility:
Units: amps
44 bus capacitance
Used for the calculation of the pahse loss ripple current. Consult factory prior to adjusting
default values.
Visibility:
Units: uf
46 menu visibility
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
110
6.25
Signals In Menu
Table 6-24Signals In Menu Parameters

calibrate analog select
0
Use this parameter to choose the desired sensor to calibrate. Once both set min and set max
has been done, this value will return to disabled.
Units: enum
calibrate analog set
1
Allows setting of the full-scale range of the analog input by setting its maximum and minimum
values (disable, set min, set max).
Visibility:
calibrate analog select is not disabled.
Units: enum
calibrate min volts
2
The value read during SET MIN step of the analog calibration process. While the calibration is
in process this value or calibrate max volts will be equal to 99.999, showing which value is still
undetermined.
Visibility:
Units: volts
calibrate max volts
3
The value read during SET MAX step of the analog calibration process. While the calibration
is in process this value or calibrate min volts will be equal to 99.999, showing which value is
still undetermined.
Visibility:
Units: volts
up speed source
4
Used to select the upstroke speed source. Enumerated values include: KEYPAD, ADC 1
Units: enum
keypad up spm
5
downstroke speeds.
Visibility:
Units: spm
Default: 6
ADC up min
6
The minimum value, in spm, for the scaling of the sensor input.
Visibility:
Units: spm
Default: 0.0
7
ADC up max
The maximum value, in spm, for the scaling of the sensor input.
Visibility:
Units: spm
Default: 1175.0
ADC up min volts
8
The minimum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate analog set to automate the
calibration process.
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
ADC up max volts
9
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
10 ADC up spm
If up speed source is ADC 1 ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual
analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if up speed source = DISABLED.
Visibility:
Units: spm
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
111

11 external up spm
If up speed source is SERIAL SLAVE, then an appropriate value must be serially or manually
entered.
Visibility:
up speed source is SERIAL SLAVE
Units: spm
Default: 250.0
12 down speed source
Used to select the downstroke speed source. Enumerated values include: KEYPAD, ADC 1
Visibility:
Units: enum
13 keypad down spm
When down speed source is KEYPAD, the user enters the desired downstroke speed here.
Visibility:
Units: spm
14 ADC down min
The minimum value, in spm, for the scaling of the sensor input.
Visibility:
Units: spm
Default: 0.0
15 ADC down max
The maximum value, in spm, for the scaling of the sensor input.
Visibility:
Units: spm
Default: 1175.0
16 ADC down min voltsThe minimum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate
analog set to automate the calibration process.
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
17 ADC down max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
18 ADC down spm
If down speed source is ADC 1 ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual
analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if down speed source = DISABLED.
Visibility:
Units: spm
19 external down spm
If down speed source is SERIAL SLAVE, then an appropriate value must be serially or
manually entered.
Visibility:
down speed source is SERIAL SLAVE
Units: spm
20 air bal prs source
Choose one of the available inputs. An error message will appear if the Input has already
associated with another signal or the Input is not available.
Units: enum
Default: KEYPAD
21 air bal prs min
The minimum value for the scaling of the input.
Visibility:
air bal prs source is ADC1 ADC 11
Default: 0
22 air bal prs max
The maximum value for the scaling of the input.
Visibility:
Default: 100
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
112

23 air bal prs min volts
The minimum voltage expected at the analog input.
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
24 air bal prs max volts
The maximum voltage expected at the analog input.
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if
air bal source = DISABLED.
Visibility:
air bal prs source is not DISABLED
26 air bal prs min fault
The minumum voltage before a fault is issued.
Visibility:
Default: 100
27 air bal prs max fault
The maximum voltage before a fault is issued.
Visibility:
Default: 0
28 air bal prs min warning
The minimum voltage before a warning is issued.
Visibility:
Default: 100
29 air bal prs max warning
The maximum voltage before a warning is issued.
Visibility:
Default: 0
30 air bal prs fault time
The time that must elapse to convert a warning condition to a fault. Fault masks are
automatically handled:
A value of 0 disables warnings converting to faults and only warnings will be logged in the
Event Log. No fault condition will be logged nor will the drive stop.
If the value is non-zero, and the value is within the warning range, a warning will be logged,
and if the value remains in the warning range for this amount of time, a fault will be logged and
the drive will be stopped.
If the value is non-zero, and the value is within the fault range a fault will be logged and the
drive will be stopped.
Visibility:
air balprs source is not DISABLED
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
31 air bal prs restart delay
The time that must elapse after the offending condition returns to normal before an auto fault
restart is attempted. A value of 0 disables restarts for this condition.
Visibility:
air balprs source is not KEYPAD
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
32 air pump prs source
Units: enum
Default: KEYPAD
33 air pump prs min
Visibility:
air pump prs source is ADC1 ADC 11
Default: 0
34 air pump prs max
Visibility:
Default: 100
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
113

35 air pump prs min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
36 air pump prs max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
Visibility:
air pump prs source is not DISABLED
38 casing prs source
Units: enum
Default: KEYPAD
39 casing prs min
Visibility:
tubing prs source is ADC1 ADC 11
Default: 0
40 casing prs max
Visibility:
Default: 100
41 casing prs min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
42 casing prs max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
43 casing prs rtu word
The Modbus Master source instruction for the RTU Master protocol.
Visibility:
tubing prs source is MODBUS MASTER
Units: AAADUURRRRR A=address, D=decimals, U=Units, R=register address.
Address (A): Leading 0s are omitted.
Decimals (D): Valid values: 0 = Integer, 1 = x.x, 2 = x.xx, 3 = x.xxx, 4 = x.xxxx, 5 = x.xxxxx, 6 =
x.xxxxxx, 7 = x.xxxxxxx, 8 = x.xxxxxxxx, 9 = Floating Point value. Note: Floating point values
are always read as two 16-bit registers.
Units (UU): The device documentation will list the units of the value. Chose an appropriate
selection from the following: 01 = psi, 02 = bar, 03=kpa, 04=gpm, 05=lpm,06=bpd, 07=cmpd,
08=scfm, 09=scmh, 10=mscfd, 11=mscmd, 12= deg C, 13 = deg F, 14=volts, 15=%, 16=rpm,
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
44 casing prs value
casing prs source = KEYPAD.
Visibility:
tubing prs source is not KEYPAD
45 casing pressure
The pressure in the casing. If the pumping unit is producing up the tubing, enter tubing
pressure here. If tubing prs source = KEYPAD, enter the correct casing pressure value,
otherwise value is read from the sensor.
Max: 9999
Default: 0
46 casing prs max fault
Visibility:
Default: 100
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
114

47 casing prs min fault
The minimum voltage before a fault is issued.
Visibility:
Default: 0
48 casing prs max warning
Visibility:
Default: 100
49 casing prs min warning
Visibility:
Default: 0
50 casing prs fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
51 casing prs restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
52 casing temp source
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
53 casing temp min
Visibility:
casing prs source is ADC1 ADC 11
Units: F/C
Default: 0
54 casing temp max
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
55 casing temp min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
56 casing temp max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
115

57 casing temp rtu word
Visibility:
casing prs source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
58 casing temp value
casing prs source = DISABLED.
Visibility:
casing prs source is not DISABLED
59 casing temp max fault
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
60 casing temp min fault
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
61 casing temp max warning
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
62 casing temp min warning
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
63 casing temp fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
64 casing temp restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
65 tubing prs source
Units: enum
Default: KEYPAD
66 tubing prs min
Visibility:
Default: 0
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
116

67 tubing prs max
Visibility:
Default: 100
68 tubing prs min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
69 tubing prs max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
70 tubing prs rtu word
Visibility:
tubing prs source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
71 tubing prs value
tubing prs source = KEYPAD.
Visibility:
read/write
72 tubing pressure
The pressure in the tubing. If the pumping unit is producing up the tubing, enter tubing
pressure here. If tubing prs source
= KEYPAD, enter value, otherwise value is read from the sensor.
Max: 9999
Default: 0
73 tubing prs max fault
Visibility:
Default: 100
74 tubing prs min fault
Visibility:
Default: 0
75 tubing prs max warning
Visibility:
Default: 100
76 tubing prs min warning
Visibility:
Default: 0
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
117

77 tubing prs fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
78 tubing prs restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
79 tubing temp source
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
80 tubing temp min
Visibility:
tubing temp source is ADC1 ADC 11
Units: F/C
Default: 0
81 tubing temp max
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
82 tubing temp min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
83 tubing temp max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
84 tubing temp rtu word
Visibility:
tubing temp source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
85 tubing temp value
tubing temp source = DISABLED.
Visibility:
tubing temp source is not DISABLED
86 tubing temp max fault
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
118

87 tubing temp min fault
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
88 tubing temp max warning
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
89 tubing temp min warning
Visibility:
Units: F/C
Default: 0
90 tubing temp fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
91 tubing temp restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
92 fluid flow source
Units: enum
Default: ESTIMATE
93 fluid flow min
Visibility:
fluid flow source is ADC1 ADC 11
94 fluid flow max
Visibility:
95 fluid flow min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
96 fluid flow max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
119

97 fluid flow rtu word
Visibility:
fluid flow source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
98 fluid flow value
fluid flow source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
fluid flow source is not ESTIMATE
stroking rate updated once per stroke.
100 fluid flow max fault
Visibility:
101 fluid flow min fault
Visibility:
102 fluid flow max warning
Visibility:
103 fluid flow min warning
Visibility:
104 fluid flow fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
105 fluid flow restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
106 gas flow source
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
120

107 gas flow min
Visibility:
gas flow source is ADC1 ADC 11
108 gas flow max
Visibility:
Units: flow units
109 gas flow min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
110 gas flow max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
111 gas flow rtu word
Visibility:
gas flow source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
112 gas flow value
gas flow source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
gas flow source is not DISABLED
113 gas flow monitor
The gas flow of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and
Visibility:
114 gas flow max fault
Visibility:
115 gas flow min fault
Visibility:
116 gas flow max warning
Visibility:
117 gas flow min warning
Visibility:
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
121

118 gas flow fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
119 gas flow restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
120 intake prs source
Units: enum
Default: ESTIMATE
121 intake prs min
Visibility:
intake prs source is ADC1 ADC 11
122 intake prs max
Visibility:
123 intake prs min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
124 intake prs max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
125 intake prs rtu word
Visibility:
intake prs source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
126 intake prs value
intake prs source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
intake prs source is not ESTIMATE
The intake prs of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
General Information
122

128 intake prs max fault
Visibility:
129 intake prs min fault
Visibility:
130 intake prs max warning
Visibility:
131 intake prs min warning
Visibility:
132 intake prs fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
133 intake prs restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
134 discharge prs source
Units: enum
Default: ESTIMATE
135 discharge prs min
Visibility:
discharge prs source is ADC1 ADC 11
136 discharge prs max
Visibility:
137 discharge prs min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
138 discharge prs max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
123

139 discharge prs rtu word
Visibility:
discharge prs source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
140 discharge prs value
discharge prs source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
discharge prs source is not ESTIMATE
141 pump discharge pressure
The discharge prs of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill
and stroking rate updated once per stroke.
142 discharge prs max fault
Visibility:
143 discharge prs min fault
Visibility:
144 discharge prs max warning
Visibility:
145 discharge prs min warning
Visibility:
146 discharge prs fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
147 discharge prs restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
148 user A source
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
read/write
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
124

149 user A units
Choose one.
Visibility:
user A source is ADC1 ADC 11
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
150 user A min
Visibility:
Units: user A units
151 user A max
Visibility:
Units: user A units
152 user A min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
153 user A max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
154 user A rtu word
Visibility:
user A source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
155 user A value
user A source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
user A source is not DISABLED
Units: user A units
156 user A max fault
Visibility:
Units: user A units
157 user A min fault
Visibility:
Units: user A units
158 user A max warning
Visibility:
Units: user A units
159 user A min warning
Visibility:
Units: user A units
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
125

160 user A fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
161 user A restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
162 user B source
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
163 user B units
Choose one.
Visibility:
user B source is ADC1 ADC 11
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
164 user B min
Visibility:
Units: user B units
165 user B max
Visibility:
Units: user B units
166 user B min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
167 user B max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
168 user B rtu word
Visibility:
user B source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
169 user B value
user B source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
user B source is not DISABLED
Units: user B units
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
126

170 user B max fault
Visibility:
Units: user B units
171 user B min fault
Visibility:
Units: user B units
172 user B max warning
Visibility:
Units: user B units
173 user B min warning
Visibility:
Units: user B units
174 user B fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
175 user B restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
176 user C source
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
177 user C units
Choose one.
Visibility:
user C source is ADC1 ADC 11
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
178 user C min
Visibility:
Units: user C units
179 user C max
Visibility:
Units: user C units
180 user C min voltsThe minimum voltage expected at the analog input.
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
181 user C max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
127

182 user C rtu word
Visibility:
user C source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
183 user C value
user C source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
user C source is not DISABLED
Units: user C units
184 user C max fault
Visibility:
Units: user C units
185 user C min fault
Visibility:
Units: user C units
186 user C max warning
Visibility:
Units: user C units
187 user C min warning
Visibility:
Units: user C units
188 user C fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
189 user C restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
190 temp 1 source
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
191 temp 1 min
Visibility:
temp 1 source is f ADC1 ADC 11
Units: F/C
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
128

192 temp 1 max
Visibility:
temp 1 source is ADC1 ADC 11
Units: F/C
193 temp 1 min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
194 temp 1 max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
195 temp 1 rtu word
Visibility:
temp 1 source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
196 temp 1 value
temp 1 source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
temp 1 source is not DISABLED
Units: F/C
197 temp 1 max fault
Visibility:
Units: F/C
198 temp 1 min fault
Visibility:
Units: F/C
199 temp 1 max warning
Visibility:
Units: F/C
200 temp 1 min warning
Visibility:
Units: F/C
201 temp 1 fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
129

202 temp 1 restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
203 temp 2 source
read/write
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
204 temp 2 min
Visibility:
Units: F/C
205 temp 2 max
Visibility:
Units: F/C
206 temp 2 min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
207 temp 2 max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
208 temp 2 rtu word
Visibility:
temp 2 source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
209 temp 2 value
temp 2 source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
Units: F/C
210 temp 2 max fault
Visibility:
Units: F/C
211 temp 2 min fault
Visibility:
Units: F/C
212 temp 2 max warning
Visibility:
Units: F/C
213 temp 2 min warning
Visibility:
Units: F/C
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
130

214 temp 2 fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
215 temp 2 restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
216 water cut source
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
217 water cut min
Visibility:
water cut source is ADC1 ADC 11
Units: %
218 water cut max
Visibility:
Units: %
219 water cut min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
220 water cut max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
221 water cut rtu word
Visibility:
water cut source is MODBUS MASTER
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
222 water cut value
water cut source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility:
water cut source is not DISABLED
Units: %
223 water cut max fault
Visibility:
Units: %
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
131

224 water cut min fault
Visibility:
Units: %
225 water cut max warning
Visibility:
Units: %
226 water cut min warning
read/write
Visibility:
Units: %
227 water cut fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
228 water cut restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
229 load cell source
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
230 load cell min
Visibility:
load cell source is not DISABLED
Units: lb/kg
Default: 0
231 load cell max
Visibility:
Units: lb/kg
Default: 50000
232 load cell min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
233 load cell max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
234 load cell value
load cell analog = DISABLED. This value is used for plotting only. No drive control uses this
value.
Visibility:
Units: lb/kg
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
132

235 fill pot source
associated with another signal or the Input is not available. Use only for simulate mode.
Visibility:
fill simulation mode = POTENTIOMETER
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
236 fill pot min
Visibility:
fill pot source is not DISABLED
Units: %
Default: 0
237 fill pot max
Visibility:
Units: %
Default: 50000
238 fill pot min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
239 fill pot max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
240 fill pot value
fill pot analog = DISABLED.
Visibility:
Units: %
242 menu visibility
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
General Information
133
6.26
Signals Out Menu

Table 6-25Signals Out Menu Parameters

dac clock level
0
The dac outputs are written on this clock setup. Power must be cycled when this value is
changed to reconfigure the dac clock to run at the new level.
Units: enum
Default: DRIVE CLOCK
dac 1 select
1
Allows selection of the variable to be output from the analog channel.
Visibility:
dac 1 select is not DISABLED
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
dac 1 item
2
This item holds the dictionary address which value is currently being written.
Visibility:
dac 1 select is ITEM
Units: decimal
dac 1 ptr
3
This item holds the memory address which value is currently being written.
Visibility:
dac 1 select is SHORT PTR or LONG PTR
Units: decimal
dac 1 auto scale
4
Certain dac signals scaling is calculated from other setup items. For example, UPID
VEL_CMDs mulipliers and divisors are calculated from max rpm. When max rpm is changed
the dacs scaling is also changed. If the dacs scaling is to be fixed, dac 1 auto scaling should
be set to DISABLED. Dac auto scaling should be ENABLED if the scaling is to be calculated
by the software.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
dac 1 mul
5
Used with the associated divisor to scale the analog channel output.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
dac 1 div
6
Used with the associated multiplier to scale the analog channel output.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
dac 1 abs
7
Allows selection of the output of the absolute value of a variable where appropriate.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enable
Default: disable
dac 1 output
8
The output value.
Visibility:
dac 2 select
9
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
10 dac 2 item
Visibility:
Units: decimal
11 dac 2 ptr
Visibility:
Units: decimal
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
134

12 dac 2 auto scale
by the software.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
13 dac 2 mul
Visibility:
Units: decimal
14 dac 2 div
Visibility:
Units: decimal
15 dac 2 abs
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enable
Default: disable
16 dac 2 output
The output value.
Visibility:
17 dac 3 select
Visibility:
Analog Interface Module is installed.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
18 dac 3 item
Visibility:
Units: decimal
19 dac 3 ptr
Visibility:
20
21
22
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write

Units: decimal
dac 3 auto scale
by the software.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
dac 3 mul
Visibility:
Units: decimal
dac 3 div
Visibility:
Units: decimal
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
135

23 dac 3 abs
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enable
Default: disable
24 dac 3 output
The output value.
Visibility:
25 dac 4 select
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
26 dac 4 item
Visibility:
Units: decimal
27 dac 4 ptr
Visibility:
Units: decimal
28 dac 4 auto scale
by the software.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
29 dac 4 mul
Visibility:
Units: decimal
30 dac 4 div
Visibility:
Units: decimal
31 dac 4 abs
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enable
Default: disable
32 dac 4 output
The output value.
Visibility:
33 dac 5 select
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
136

34 dac 5 item
Visibility:
Units: decimal
35 dac 5 ptr
Visibility:
Units: decimal
36 dac 5 auto scale
by the software.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
37 dac 5 mul
Visibility:
Units: decimal
38 dac 5 div
Visibility:
Units: decimal
39 dac 5 abs
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enable
Default: disable
40 dac 5 output
The output value.
Visibility:
41 dac 6 select
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
42 dac 6 item
Visibility:
Units: decimal
43 dac 6 ptr
Visibility:
Units: decimal
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
137

44 dac 6 auto scale
by the software.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
45 dac 6 mul
Visibility:
Units: decimal
46 dac 6 div
Visibility:
Units: decimal
47 dac 6 abs
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: disable
Max: enable
Default: disable
48 dac 6 output
The output value.
Visibility:
50 menu visibility
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
read/write
General Information
138
6.27
Digital I/O Menu (Discrete Parallel I/O)

Table 6-26Digital I/O Menu Parameters

digital in 0 select
0
Used to select the purpose of discrete parallel input #0 (TB1-12 on x10 DSP). Values include:
DISABLED, EXTERNAL STOP.
Units: enum
Default: EXTERNAL STOP
external stop input
1
Sets the logic polarity for the terminal block input. Values include: FAULT ON OPEN, FAULT
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
digital in 0 select is not DISABLED
Units: enum
Default: FAULT ON OPEN
external stop time
2
Delays the fault detection. A value of 0 disables the fault detection.
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.01
external stop restart override
3
Allows restarts on this fault if restart attempts = 0
Visibility:
restart attempts = 0
Units: enum
Default: ENABLE
external stop time restart delay
4
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.01
digital in 1 select
5
DISABLED, FAULT RESET.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
digital in 2 select
6
DISABLED, LIMIT SWITCH, FAULT RESET.
Units: enum
Default: LIMIT SWITCH
fault reset input
7
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
digital in 1 select is FAULT RESET
digital in 2 select is FAULT RESET
Units: enum
digital in 3 select
8
DISABLED, MODE 1, GEN RUNNING.
Units: enum
Default: MODE 1
digital in 4 select
9
DISABLED, MODE 2, GEN FAULTED.
Units: enum
Default: MODE 2
10 generator flt input
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
digital in 4 select is GEN FAULTED
Units: enum
11 digital in 5 select
DISABLED, USER FLT 1.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
139

12 user 1 fault input
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
digital in 5 select is USER FLT 1
Units: enum
13 user 1 fault time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.01
14 user 1 fault restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
DISABLED, USER FLT 2, AUTO OFF JOG SWITCH.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.01
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
19 aoj stop input
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
digital in 6 select is AUTO OFF JOG SWITCH
Units: enum
20 aoj stop time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.01
21 aoj stop restart override
Allows restarts on this fault if restart attempts = 0
Visibility:
restart attempts = 0
aoj stop restart delay is not 0.00
Units: enum
Default: DISABLE
22 aoj stop restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
DISABLED, LOW PRS FLOW, USER FLT 3, EOP ENABLE.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
140

ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.01
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
27 low prs flow input
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
digital in 7 select is LOW PRS FLOW
Units: enum
28 low prs flow time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
29 low prs flow delay
The time to delay checking foe a low pressure or low flow condition after the pump is started
from any stopped state.
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.01
30 low prs flow restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
DISABLED, HIGH PRS, USER FLT 4, CSG VALVE CNTRL.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
Units: enum
read/write
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.01
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
35 high prs input
ON CLOSE.
Visibility:
digital in 8 select is HIGH PRS
Units: enum
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
141

36 high prs time
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
37 high prs restart delay
Visibility:
Units: mins
Default: 0.00
38 digital out 0 select
Used to select the purpose of discrete parallel output #0 (TB1-5 on x10 DSP). Values include:
DISABLED, MOTOR ON STATUS, FAULT STATUS, UP STROKE, DOWN STROKE, GEN
RUN, GEN WARN, REGEN, MAINTENANCE, BRAKE, STANDBY, EOP ENABLED, CSG
VALVE ENABLED, CSG VALVE OPEN, CSG VALVE CLOSE, and CALLOUT.
Units: enum
Default: MOTOR ON STATUS
Units: enum
Default: FAULT STATUS
Units: enum
Default: UP STROKE
Units: enum
Default: DOWN STROKE
Units: enum
Default: CALLOUT
Used to select the purpose of discrete parallel output #5 (TB1-10 on x10 DSP). Values
include: DISABLED, MOTOR ON STATUS, FAULT STATUS, UP STROKE, DOWN STROKE,
GEN RUN, GEN WARN, REGEN, MAINTENANCE, BRAKE, STANDBY, EOP ENABLED,
CSG VALVE ENABLED, CSG VALVE OPEN, CSG VALVE CLOSE, and CALLOUT.
Units: enum
Default: BRAKE
45 menu visibility
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
142
6.28
Display Menu
Table 6-27Display Menu Parameters

keypad units
0
Used to convert unit display to either English or Metric.
Units: enum
Default: ENGLISH
keypad pos units
1
Establishes the units which will be used for displaying and entering all position data through
the drives keypad.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: REV
keypad vel units
2
Establishes the units which will be used for displaying and entering all velocity data through the
drives keypad.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: MINUTES
hertz units
3
Establishes the units which will be used for displaying and entering all velocity data. When
hertz units are set to ENABLED, all velocities will be entered in HZ.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLE
fluid flow units
4
Used to customize fluid flow unit displays. Values include: BPD/CMPD, GPM/LPM
Units: enum
Default: BPD/CMPD
gas flow units
5
Used to customize gas flow unit displays. Values include: SCFM/SCMH, MSCFD/MSCMD
Units: enum
Default: SCFM/SCMH
pressure units
6
Used to customize pressure unit displays. Values include: PSI/BAR, KPA
Units: enum
Default: PSI/BAR
volume units
7
Used to customize volume unit displays. BARRELS, GALS/LTRS, CUFT, CUMETERS
Units: enum
Default: BARRELS
user display 1 item
8
LCD:
Inserts user defined 3rd menu (before Quick Menu)Adds
GLCD:
Adds 1 or 2 lines to the bottom of SRP Main Menu.
Enter the parameter number of the object to be displayed.
Units: decimal
Default: dictionary item number of maximum rod load
user display 1 nsize
9
Row 1 of the user display area. The number of columns used for the name of the parameter.
Enter 0 if it is not to be displayed.
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
10 user display 1 vsize
Row 1 of the user display area. The number of columns used for the value of the parameter.
Units:
Min: 0
Default: 0
11 user display 1 usize
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
12 user display 2 item
LCD:
GLCD:
Units: decimal
Default: 0
13 user display 2 col
Row 1 of the user display area. The starting position for the second item on Row 1. Enter 0 if
it is not to be displayed.
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
143

14 user display 2 nsize
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
LCD:
GLCD:
Units: decimal
Default: dictionary address of minimum rod load
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
Units:
Min: 0
Default: 0
LCD:
GLCD:
Units: decimal
Default: 0
22 user display 4 col
Row 2 of the user display area. The starting position for the second item on Row 2. Enter 0 if
it is not to be displayed.
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Default: 0
26 visibility control
Used to show all parameters permanently.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLE
27 emulate 2x24 LCD
Used to make the optional GLCD Graphics Display screen emulate the 2x24 LCD screen on
the SRP Main Menu and SRP Quick Menu. Use only if Bluetooth Drive Keypad or Remote
Keypad Drive Link feature is required. Cycle power to the Drive whenever this parameter is
changed.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLE
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
144

28 screen saver safety
If enabled, causes the display to turn on whenever restart countdown is waiting to restart the
pumping unit. FOR SAFETY, this parameter should be left enabled. The display will also turn
on if an edge is detected on either the Run Enable or Auto Enable Inputs or if the drive is
performing a Valve Check Test.
Units: min
Min: 0.00
Max: 139.00
Default: 15.00
29 screen saver delay
Sets the inactivity time for the displays screen saver feature. A value of 0 disables the screen
saver.
Units: min
Min: 0.00
Max: 139.00
Default: 15.00
31 menu visibility
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
145
6.29
Comm Menu
Table 6-28Comm Parameters

console protocol
0
The console (RS485 or RS232) port protocol. NONE, DRIVE MENU, ESP, ANSI, MODBUS
RTU, OPTOMUX, REMOTE KEYPAD, A WELL, ZENITH, RTU MASTER.
Units: enum
Default: ESP
console term type
1
This item determines the ports emulated terminal type. Value include: VT100, RCA.
Visibility:
console protocol = DRIVE MENU
Units: enum
Default: VT100
console term size
2
This item determines the ports emulated terminal size.
Visibility:
console protocol = DRIVE MENU
Units: enum
Default: 24x40
console address
3
The console port address.
Units:
Min: 0
Max: varies
Default: 1
console baud rate
4
The console port baud rate.
Units:
Min: 300
Max: 115200
Default: 57600
console parity
5
The console port parity (none, even, odd).
Units: enum
Default: none
console checksum
6
The console port check sum (bcc, crc).
Visibility:
console protocol varies by protocol selected.
Units: enum
Default: bcc
console rtu gap
7
Console rtu gap sets the maximum interpacket gap to be a fixed value independent of baud
rate. A value of zero set the maximum interpacket gap to be dependent on baud rate as
specified in the rtu specification).
Visibility:
console protocol = MODBUS RTU
Units: sec
Default: 0.000
console units
8
Console units selects the units used when writing or reading data through the console port
protocol.
Units: enum
Min: english
Max: metric
Default: English
console pos units
9
The console port position units (in mm, feet meter, degree, rev, stroke).
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: REV
10 console vel units
Console pos units selects the position units used when writing or reading data through the
console port protocol. Selecting this value will only affect the protocol position units.
For example to a data item such as motor velocity in Strokes per Minute, select STROKE for
the pos units setup, and MINUTES on the vel units setup.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: MINUTES
11 porta protocol
The porta (RS485) port protocol. NONE, DRIVE MENU, ESP, ANSI, MODBUS RTU,
OPTOMUX, REMOTE KEYPAD, A WELL, ZENITH, RTU MASTER.
Units: enum
Default: ESP
12 porta term type
Visibility:
porta protocol = DRIVE MENU
Units: enum
Default: VT100
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
146

13 porta term size
Visibility:
porta protocol = DRIVE MENU
Units: enum
Default: 24x40
14 porta address
The porta port address.
Units:
Min: 0
Max: varies
Default: 1
15 porta baud rate
The porta port baud rate.
Units:
Min: 300
Max: 115200
Default: 57600
16 porta parity
The porta port parity (none, even, odd).
Units: enum
Default: none
17 porta stop bits
The stop bit selection for the character of the protocol running on this port.
Units: enum
Default: none
18 porta checksum
The porta port check sum (bcc, crc).
Visibility:
porta protocol varies by protocol selected.
Units: enum
Default: bcc
19 porta rtu gap
Porta rtu gap sets the maximum interpacket gap to be a fixed value independent of baud rate.
A value of zero set the maximum interpacket gap to be dependent on baud rate as specified in
the rtu specification).
Visibility:
porta protocol = MODBUS RTU
Units: sec
Default: 0.000
20 porta units
Porta units selects the units used when writing or reading data through the porta port protocol.
Units: enum
Min: english
Max: metric
Default: English
21 porta pos units
The porta port position units (in mm, feet meter, degree, rev, stroke).
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: REV
22 porta vel units
Porta pos units selects the position units used when writing or reading data through the porta
port protocol. Selecting this value will only affect the protocol position units.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: MINUTES
23 portb protocol
The portb (RS485) port protocol. NONE, DRIVE MENU, ESP, ANSI, MODBUS RTU,
OPTOMUX, REMOTE KEYPAD, A WELL, ZENITH, RTU MASTER.
Visibility:
Not available on 100MHz Compact Control Module.
Units: enum
Default: ESP
24 portb term type
Visibility:
Not available on 100MHz Compact Control Module
portb protocol = DRIVE MENU
Units: enum
Default: VT100
25 portb term size
Visibility:
portb protocol = DRIVE MENU
Units: enum
Default: 24x40
26 portb address
The portb port address.
Visibility:
Units:
Min: 0
Max: varies
Default: 1
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
147

27 portb baud rate
The portb port baud rate.
Visibility:
Units:
Min: 300
Max: 115200
Default: 57600
28 portb parity
The portb port parity (none, even, odd).
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: none
29 portb stop bits
The stop bit selection for the character of the protocol running on this port.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: none
30 portb checksum
The portb port check sum (bcc, crc).
Visibility:
portb protocol varies by protocol selected.
Units: enum
Default: bcc
31 portb rtu gap
Portb rtu gap sets the maximum interpacket gap to be a fixed value independent of baud rate.
A value of zero set the maximum interpacket gap to be dependent on baud rate as specified in
the rtu specification).
Visibility:
portb protocol = MODBUS RTU
Units: sec
Default: 0.000
32 portb units
Portb units selects the units used when writing or reading data through the portb port protocol.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: english
Max: metric
Default: English
33 portb pos units
The portb port position units (in mm, feet meter, degree, rev, stroke).
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: REV
34 portb vel units
Portb pos units selects the position units used when writing or reading data through the portb
port protocol. Selecting this value will only affect the protocol position units.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: MINUTES
35 a well address
The a well device address.
Visibility:
console protocol, porta protocol or portb protocol = A WELL
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Max: 254
Default: 1
36 a well poll rate
The a well device poll rate.
Visibility:
Units: secs
Min: 0.000
Default: 15.000
37 a well timeout
The a well device timeout time to wait for a response from the device.
Visibility:
Units: secs
Min: 0.000
Max: 5.000
Default: 1.000
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
148

38 a well retries
The a well device number of retries to wait for a response from the device.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 3
39 a well error timer
The a well device time delay before latching an a well comm fault.
Visibility:
Units: secs
Min: 0.000
Default: 0.000
40 a well packets
A display of the a well device Good Message Packet Count.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
41 a well status
A display of the a well device status in bit map order: 0=message in buffer(1), 1=message in
transit(2), 2=n/a(4), 3=fault, 4=ground fault(16), 5=sensor auto shutdown(32), 6=comm
timeout(64), 7=comm crc error(128).
Visibility:
Units: bit-wise
42 a well read count
A display of the a well device successful reads.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
43 zenith address
The zenith device address.
Visibility:
console protocol, porta protocol or portb protocol = ZENITH
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Max: 254
Default: 1
44 zenith poll rate
The zenith device poll rate.
Visibility:
Units: secs
Min: 0.000
Default: 15.000
45 zenith timeout
The zenith device timeout time to wait for a response from the device.
Visibility:
Units: secs
Min: 0.000
Max: 5.000
Default: 1.000
46 zenith retries
The zenith device number of retries to wait for a response from the device.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 3
47 zenith error timer
The zenith device time delay before latching an zenith comm fault.
Visibility:
Units: secs
Min: 0.000
Default: 0.000
48 zenith status
A display of the zenith device status in bit map order: 0=logging state(1), 1=trip relay sate(2),
2=alarm relay(4), 3=DAC fault, 4=n/a(16), 5=n/a(32), 6=comm timeout(64), 7=comm crc
error(128).
Visibility:
Units: bit-wise
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
149

49 zenith read count
A display of the zenith device successful reads.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
50 modbus rtu poll rate
The modbus rtu device poll rate.
Visibility:
console protocol, porta protocol or portb protocol = MODBUS RTU
Units: secs
Min: 0.000
Default: 15.000
51 modbus rtu timeout
The modbus rtu device timeout time to wait for a response from the device.
Visibility:
Units: secs
Min: 0.000
Max: 5.000
Default: 1.000
52 modbus rtu retries
The modbus rtu device number of retries to wait for a response from the device.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 3
53 modbus rtu word 1
Visibility:
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
54 modbus rtu value 1
The Modbus Master response for the RTU Master protocol modbus rtu word 1.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
Visibility:
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
Visibility:
Units: decimal
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
display
General Information
150

Visibility:
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
Visibility:
Units: decimal
59 modbus rtu status
A display of the modbus rtu device status in bit map order: Values include: master waiting,
read pending, retrying, timeout, crc error, comm error, read complete.
Visibility:
Units: enum
60 modbus rtu read countA display of the modbus rtu device successful reads.
Visibility:
Units: decimal
62 menu visibility
read/write
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
151
6.30
Quickstart Menu
Table 6-29Quickstart Parameters

drive model
0
Units: enum
base rpm
1
Units: rpm
Min: 0
Max: 3600
Default: 1750
motor max rpm
2
Units: rpm
Min: 0
Max: 3600
Default: 2400
motor rms limit
3
If the motor thermal RMS exceeds the motor rms limit, the motor will fault off with an RMS
fault. This value is typically set to the motor nameplate rated current. Set this value to zero to
disable the motor RMS fault check.
Default: 0
db resistance
4
The resistance value of the dynamic braking resistor. Refer to the Tables section for
appropriate value.
Units: ohms
Min: 0
Max: 999999
Default: see Table
db watts
5
The wattage value of the dynamic braking resistor. Refer to the Tables section for appropriate
values.
Units: watts
Min: 0
Max: 9999
Default: see Table
gear ratio
6
Units: x:1
Min: 1
Max: none
Default: 25
unit rtd torque
7
The output torque rating of the gearbox scaled down by 1000x (standard API convention). For
example, a value of 20 corresponds to a 20,000 in-lb gearbox rating. This parameter is used by
the Well Report.
Units: 1000 in-lb
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 18
unit rtd rod load
8
The lift rating of the pumping unit scaled down by 100x (standard API convention). For
example, a value of 80 corresponds to an 8,000 lb lift rating. This parameter is used by the
Well Report.
Units: 100 lbs
Min: 0
Max: 9999
Default: 80
unit rtd stroke
9
The rated stroke length of the pumping unit (standard API convention). For example, a value of
32 corresponds to a 32 inch stroke. This parameter is used by the Well Report.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 999
Default: 32
10 linear lead
The linear movement per revolution of the gearbox output shaft, typically equal to the 3.14
times the pinion diameter. Note: Stroke ID and Well ID are required after changing linear lead.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 12.566
11 structural imbalance
The weight of the rack, entered as a negative value (-110 pounds for 32 inch LRP; -135
pounds for 44 inch LRP; -250 pounds for 56 inch LRP).
Units: pounds
Min: none
Max: none
Default: -160
to zero.
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 1000
Default: 460
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
152

13 motor max torque
The maximum torque of the motor. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Max: 9999.99
Default: 0
14 torque limit
The inverter output torque is limited to this value, expressed as a percentage of maximum
torque.
Units: % max
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 100
15 air bal cylinder count
The number of air balance cylinders on the unit. Enter 0 if no air counterbalance exists.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 0
16 air bal prs source
Units: enum
Default: KEYPAD
17 air bal diameter
The diameter of the air balance cylinder.
Units: inches
Min: 1
Max: 24
Default: 6
The compression ratio of the air counterbalance. This parameter is not visible (not required) if
the unit has a pressure sensors on the balance cylinder.
Units: x:1
Min: 0
Max: none
Default: 0
19 air bal prs min
Visibility:
Default: 0
20 air bal prs max
Visibility:
Default: 100
21 air bal prs min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
22 air bal prs max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
Visibility:
24 air pump cylinder count
The number of air pump (compressor) cylinders on the unit. Enter 0 if no air pump exists.
Units: inches
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 0
25 air pump prs source
Units: enum
Default: KEYPAD
26 air pump diameter
The diameter of the air pump cylinder.
Units: inches
Min: 1
Max: 24
Default: 2.5
27 air pump max pressure
The maximum pressure the air pump is capable of producing. This parameter is not visible (not
required) if the unit has a pressure sensors on the air pump cylinder.
Units: lbs
28 air pump prs min
Visibility:
Default: 0
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
153

29 air pump prs max
Visibility:
Default: 100
30 air pump prs min volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
31 air pump prs max volts
Visibility:
Units: volts
Min: -10.000
Max: 10.000
Default: 0.000
Visibility:
air pump prs source is not DISABLED
33 stroke id torq limit
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 12
34 srp sub state
A display of the application state machine "sub state," useful in observing the progress of the
Stroke ID.
35 stroke id enable
Set to ENABLE and turn the motor on to initiate the Stroke ID test. See Quick Start Guide for
details. If Stroke ID can not be executed, stroke id enable must be set to OVERRIDE. The
stroke id length parameter must then be manually entered. Consult UNICO for correct value.
Units: ENABLE, DISABLE, or OVERRIDE
36 stroke id length
Max: none
Default: 0
37 torque invert
Inverts the direction of the motor. This is equivalent to swapping the motor leads in hardware.
Units: enum
38 snug torque limit
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 8
39 srp sub state
40 well ID state
A display of the the progress of the Well ID.
41 well ID status
A display of the the final status of the Well ID. See Quick Startup Guide for details.
42 well id enable
Set to ENABLE and turn the motor on to initiate the Well ID routine. See Quick Start Guide for
details.
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
154

43 ref input polarity
Used to set the polarity of the reference input. The reference input display value should be 1
(TRUE) when the sensor is blocked, and 0 (FALSE) when not blocked. (If not, ref input polarity
should be changed.) If the ref input polarity is incorrect, the unit will display REF FAULT in the
running status and REF INPUT LOSS in the lrp status.
Units: NORMAL or INVERTED
Default: INVERTED
44 rotary inertia
does not include the effect of sucker rods or downhole equipment. During startup, the the
rotary inertia parameter is set during the Well ID. The rotary inertia value will affect the shape
of the dynacards during acceleration and deceleration.
45 max possible SPM
parameters.
46 up maximum spm
Units: spm
Min: up minimum spm
spm
47 up minimum spm
The minimum upstroke speed limit of the pump. Also serves as the overall maximum speed
Units: spm
Min: 1
Default: 2.5
48 down maximum spm
Units: spm
spm
49 down minimum spm
Units: spm
Min: 1
Default: 2.5
50 speed mode select
Units: enum
51 keypad up spm
downstroke speeds.
Visibility:
Units: spm
Default: 6
52 keypad down spm
When down speed source is KEYPAD, the user enters the desired downstroke speed here.
Visibility:
Units: spm
53 min bus voltage
A display of the minimum latched bus voltage over the last stroke. This parameter may be
useful in setting the power loss bus level parameter.
to zero.
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 1000
Default: 460
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
General Information
155

55 power loss bus tol
The controller will assume input power is lost if the bus voltage drops below an averaged
rolling minimum bus voltage minus the power loss bus tol value. Upon detecting power loss,
the unit will convert the motor into a generator and park the unit under its own power. To
disable the power loss bus tol feature, set this value to 1000 (the power loss bus level control
will still be functional, however).
Units: volts
Min: 0
Max: 1000
Default: 100
56 stuff box friction
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 2000
Default: 0
57 rod friction
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 5000
Default: 300
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 0
59 up position
position minimum value is limited to within the ref window tol of the upper reference sensor
position. Zero position is defined as fully down.
Units: inches
Min: upper ref position Max: stroke id length 2
Default: 0
60 down position
The down position data entry value is limited to a minimum of 3.2 inches. Zero position is
defined as fully down.
Units: inches
Min: 3.2
61 remote run enable
Used to remotely (serially) start and stop the drive. Operator intervention at the hard run
switch overrides this parameter. While Run Enable (IN 11) and/or Auto Enable (IN 10) are
open (not asserted), this value may not be changed from DISABLE. Once the Operator has
asserted the Auto Enable (IN 10) input, this value is changed to ENABLE. Subsequently, the
operation of the Drive may be remotely stopped by serially writing a 0 (ENABLE -> DISABLE)
to this parameter and remotely restarted by writing a 1 (DISABLE -> ENABLE).
62
! Attention
Units: enum
remote fault reset
Used to remotely (serially) issue a fault-reset request to clear ANY/ALL existing faults. No fault
conditions are exempted from being remotely reset. Care and consideration should be used
before issuing a request. After issuing the request a fault condition may still exist. Shortly after
value is changed to ENABLE it will return to DISABLE.
Units: enum
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
156

63 lrp status
The status of the linear rod pump. Values include:
64
65
66
67
display
MOTOR OFF
POSITION ERRORPosition tracking error was detected. Check unit for binding or
mechanical problem, or torque limit during operation above base speed.
VELOCITY ERRORVelocity tracking error was detected. Check unit for binding or
mechanical problem, or torque limit during operation above base speed.
SNUG FAULTUnit did not snug to stop at the expected position. Check for mechanical
FAULTEDdrive fault is present.
POWER LOSSPower loss control has detected a power loss condition.
REF INPUT LOSS The reference input was not received within the expected ref window tol
target window identified during the last Well ID. The unit will immediately snug reference and
try again. Check sensor wiring and spacing. This fault may indicate that Well ID is required (or
was faulty), or that system is at torque limit.. This fault will also occur if the stroke id length
value is too small, preventing the unit from stroking up far enough to cross the sensor. This
fault may also indicate a snug problem, where the unit did not extend completely down during
the snug down it may be necessary to increase the snug torque limit. (This is especially
true of air counterbalanced units, where snug air compensation may be required.) If this fault
develops over time, it may indicate a problem with the safety spring.
MAX GEARBOX TORQ Controller has detected a gearbox torque value exceeding the snug
auto max gearbox torq value.
MIN GEARBOX TORQ Controller has detected a gearbox torque value below the snug auto
min gearbox torq value (a negative value).
NORMAL OPERATION
srp main state
A display of the application state machine "main state," useful in troubleshooting the unit.
srp sub state
SRP troubleshooter
menu visibility
parameters.
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
157
6.31
Simulate Menu
Table 6-30Simulate Menu Parameters

simulate mode
0
Enables the pumping unit simulation. NORMALLY NOT ENABLED ON A REAL PUMPING
SYSTEM.
Units: enum
Default: DISABLE
simulate ref input
1
Enables reference input simulation. NORMALLY NOT ENABLED ON A REAL PUMPING
SYSTEM.
Visibility:
simulate mode = ENABLE
Units: enum
Default: ENABLE
simulate drive
2
Enables the drive/motor simulator (eliminates the need to have an actual motor). When
simulating the drive, the following parameter values must also be entered:
simulate drive - ENABLED
vector source XLESS (cycle power after changing this parameter)
upid motor source XLESS (cycle power after changing this parameter)
motor fbk size 8192
system gain Desired system gain; if unknown, set equal to sim calc system gain.
motor max torque Desired motor max torque; if unknown, set equal to motor max torque
monitor.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLE
simulate drive load
3
During simulate mode, if simulate drive load is ENABLED, the motor speed will fluctuate in
response to the simulated rod and pump load, emulating the response of the real system. The
simulate drive parameter must be ENABLED to simulate drive load.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLE
physical simulate
4
The simulate mode creates a virtual (simulated) pumping unit. If physical simulate is
ENABLED, the virtual pumping unit parameters are set independently, using the parameters
prefixed with "phys," such as phys rotary inertia or phys gearbox efficiency. If physical simulate
is DISABLED, the virtual pumping unit parameters are simply set equal to the values found on
the Pumping Unit Menu. Physical simulation mode is useful in simulating a difference between
the actual physical pumping unit and the controller's perception of the pumping unit as defined
by the setup parameters on the Pumping Unit Menu.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLE
fill simulation mode
5
Allows the user to select the manner in which the down-hole pump fill is simulated. The
following options are available:
AUTO Used during non-simulation modes only, and causes predicted pump fill and fluid level
to be automatically set to the actual measured values (so the predicted dynacards track the
actual dynacards).
KEYPAD Used during simulation or non-simulation modes, and allows the Simulated Liquid
Fill and Sim Fluid Over Pump parameters to be manually entered.
POTENTIOMETER Used during simulation mode only, and allows the Sim Liquid Fill to be
set with a potentiometer. Sim Fluid Over Pump parameter is still set from the keypad.
RESERVOIR Used during simulation mode only, and allows a Vogel IPR well inflow to be
simulated. During this mode, Sim Liquid Fill and Sim Fluid Over Pump parameters are
automatically set. Reservoir parameters are entered on the Reservoir menu, and the following
parameters are entered on the Simulate Menu: sim gas oil ratio, sim standing valve Cv, sim
gas separation eff (efficiency). Well inflow is displayed as sim well inflow rate, and pump
outflow rate is displayed as fluid flow monitor.
Units: enum
Default: AUTO
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
158

fill pot source
6
Used to select the desired analog input channel for the potentiometer driven pump fill
simulation input. An error message will appear if the Input has already associated with another
signal or the Input is not available. Use only for simulate mode.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Default: DISABLED
fill pot value
7
fill pot analog = DISABLED.
Visibility:
Units: %
sim liquid fill
8
If fill simulation mode is set to KEYPAD, the desired simulated pump fill is entered here.
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 100
sim fluid over pump
9
If fill simulation mode is set to KEYPAD or POTENTIOMETER, the simulated fluid over pump
(fluid level over pump) is entered here.
Units: ft/m
The estimated pump intake pressure.
11 vector source
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: motor socket
Max: xless
Default: xless
12 upid motor source
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: motor socket
Max: xless
Default: xless
13 upid load source
Source of the load position feedback.
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min: motor socket
Max: xless
Default: xless
14 motor fbk size
Enter the pulses per revolution of the motor position feedback device. NA for XLESS mode.
Visibility:
Units: pulses
Min: 0
Max:
Default: 2048
15 base rpm
Units: rpm
Min: 0
Max: 3600
Default: 1750
16 motor max rpm
The maximum allowable speed of the pumping unit motor.
Units: rpm
Min: 0
Max: 3600
Default: 1175
17 sim drive rated power
The drive size to be simulated, in horsepower.
Visibility:
Units: hp/kw
Min: 0
Max: 99999
Default: 0
18 sim drive rating
The drive rating to be simulated. Values include CT, VT or ET.
Visibility:
Units: enum
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
159

19 sim drive motor max torque
A display of the maximum possible motor torque based on sim drive rated power and sim drive
rating.
Visibility:
Units: ftlb/Nm
20 sim drive motor max power
A display of the maximum possible motor power based on sim drive rated power and sim drive
rating.
Visibility:
Units: hp/kw
21 motor max power
The maximum power of the motor as determined during AC Test Utility. During Simulate Mode,
this parameter must be set equal to the sim drive motor max power value.
Units: hp/kw
Min: 0
Max: 999.99
Default: 0
22 motor max torque monitor
A display of the peak motor torque observed over the previous stroke.
Units: ft-lbs
23 motor peak power monitor
A display of the peak motor power observed over the previous stroke.
Units: ft-lbs
24 sim calc system gain
The theoretical system gain as determined from the rotary inertia and motor max torque
values. When simulate drive is ENABLED, the system gain is typically set equal to this value
(to ensure stability).
Visibility:
Units: 1/sec/sec
25 system gain
The gain of the system controller, determined during System ID Test and non-moving AC Test.
When simulate drive is ENABLED, the system gain is typically set equal to the sim calc system
gain value (to ensure stability).
Units: 1/sec/sec Min: 0
Max: 999.999
Default: 0
26 system wn
The natural frequency of the drive closed loop control.
Units: rad/sec
Min: 0
Max: 99.9
Default: 0
27 stroke id length
Max: none
Default: 0
28 gear ratio
Units: x:1
Min: 1
Max: none
Default: 25
29 rod friction
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 5000
Default: 300
30 API cntrweight value
The theoretical counterweight force required to balance the pumping unit given the current
operating conditions. Note that this value is affected by the current actual or simulated fluid
level.
Units: lbs/kg
display
display
read/write
display
display
display
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
display
General Information
160

31 stuff box friction
Units: lb/kg
Min: 0
Max: 2000
Default: 0
32 counterweight value
The current actual counterweight force.
Units: inlb /Nm or lbs/kg
33 rotary inertia
does not include the effect of sucker rods or downhole equipment. During startup, the user
must set the rotary inertia parameter equal to either the known value, or to the calc rotary
inertia value (calc rotary inertia is continuously identified while the unit is running uncoupled
from the rods and pump). The rotary inertia value will affect the shape of the dynacards during
acceleration and deceleration.
Max: 999999
Default: 0
34 gearbox efficiency
The efficiency of the gearbox and rack-and-pinion mechanism.
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 90
35 phys rod friction
Represents the actual rod friction of the system vs. the rod friction in the Rod/Pump Menu. If
both values are equal, no error is introduced.
Visibility:
physical simulate = ENABLE
Units: deg
Min: 0
Max: 5000
Default: 300
36 phys counterweight value
Represents the actual counterweight force of the system vs. the counterweight value in the
Pumping Unit Menu. If both values are equal, no error is introduced.
Visibility:
Units: inlb/Nm or lbs/kg
Min: 0
Max: 999999 Default: 0
37 phys rotary inertia
Represents the actual rotary inertia of the system vs. the rotary inertia in the Pumping Unit
Menu. If both values are equal, no error is introduced.
Visibility:
Max: 999,999
Default: 0
38 phys gearbox efficiency
Represents the actual gearbox efficiency of the system vs. the gearbox efficiency in the
Gearbox Menu. If both values are equal, no error is introduced.
Visibility:
Units: %
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 96
39 sim gas oil ratio
Enter the desired gas/oil ratio for the reservoir simulation (fill simulation mode = RESERVOIR).
Visibility:
Units: scf/STB
Min: 0
Max: 10,000
Default: 500
40 sim standing valve Cv
Enter the desired standing valve Cv value used during reservoir simulation (fill simulation mode
= RESERVOIR). The standing valve Cv is a characteristic measure of the ability for fluid to
flow past the pump standing valve. The greater the value, the less the resistance to flow. The
lower the value (higher resistance), the more likely gas breakout will be simulated in the pump
barrel. This value is specified by the pump manufacturer.
Visibility:
Units: gal/min @ 1 PSI
Min: 0
Max: 10
Default: 3.5
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
read/write
General Information
161

41 sim gas separation eff
The efficiency of the gas separator (gas anchor), used to determine the portion of gas that is
introduced to the pump barrel (versus vented to the casing) during reservoir simulation (fill
simulation mode set to RESERVOIR). Set to 100% to vent all gas out the casing; set to 0% to
introduce all of the gas into the pump barrel.
Visibility:
Units: percent
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 50
42 sim well inflow rate
The inflow rate of the reservoir into the well bore during reservoir simulation (fill simulation
mode set to RESERVOIR).
Visibility:
The fluid flow of the pump averaged over the previous stroke, derived from the pump
characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and stroking rate updated once per stroke.
The fluid flow of the pump averaged over the previous ten strokes, derived from the pump
characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and stroking rate updated once per stroke.
45 sim reservoir state
Displays the state of the reservoir simulation during reservoir simulation mode (fill simulation
mode set to RESERVOIR).
RESERVOIR OFF reservoir simulation not turned on (fill simulation mode not set to
RESERVOIR).
FULL PUMP pump is full.
PUMP OFF fluid is at the pump, and pump is not filling completely; no gas breakout in pump
barrel.
GAS IN PUMP pump is not filling completely because of gas breakout in pump barrel; fluid is
over the pump.
PUMP OFF WITH GAS fluid is at the pump, pump is not filling completely, and gas is
breaking out in pump barrel.
NO INFLOW reservoir parameters are set such that there is no reservoir inflow
Visibility:
Units: enum
Min:
Max: NO_INFLOW
Default: AUTO
46 pump spm monitor
The speed of the pumping unit averaged over the previous stroke.
Units: spm
47 simulate troubleshooter
49 menu visibility
read/write
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
read/write
General Information
162
7
7.1
System Startup
Overview
This section provides information on the initial startup of the drive and motor. The AC Test Utility is
used to initialize basic motor parameters through a series of questions and to automatically identify
system parameters with a series of tests.
Use the Quick Start Guide and/or Exhaustive Startup Checklist for comprehensive instructions.
7.2
AC Test
Upon entering the AC Test Utility, a series of questions are asked to give the software basic
information about the motor. Personnel should be experienced in understanding AC Test, and what
is about to occur. The LRP requires NON-MOVING AC Test.
1.
Press the [Ent] key to enter this routine from the AC Test Setup Menu. Select the motor type
(Induction or Synchronous). (Different tests are performed depending on the motor type used.)
Typically, the induction motor option is selected.
2.
Select actune mode. Choose NON MOVING
3.
Enter the motor horse power from the motor nameplate, and then press the [Ent] key. If the
displayed value is already correct, simply press the [Ent] key.
4.
Enter the rated voltage from the motor nameplate, and then press the [Ent] key. If the
5.
Enter the rated frequency from the motor nameplate that corresponds to the voltage entered
above and then press the [Ent] key. If the displayed value is already correct, simply press the
[Ent] key.
6.
Enter the rated current from the motor nameplate and then press the [Ent] key. If the displayed
value is already correct, simply press the [Ent] key.
7.
Enter the rated or base rpm from the motor nameplate and then press the [Ent] key. If the
8.
Choose [1] if the Drive is equipped with DB protection, which is typical in this application.
At this point, the display will scroll through the list of parameter test utilities in the AC Test Utility.
Choose [1] Startup.
7.3
Application Start-Up
Use the Quick Start Guide and/or Exhaustive Startup Checklist for comprehensive instructions.
General Information
System Startup
163
8
8.1
Faults, Warnings and Events

Overview
This chapter provides information on software features for troubleshooting and maintaining the
drive. It discusses the hardware and software fault detection system, including fault masking and
fault history. Refer to the installation guide for hardware operational theory and schematics, power
electronics troubleshooting procedures, maintenance issues, and a list of field-replaceable
components.
8.2
Fault System
The drive monitors many signals to determine if a fault condition exists. The most effective way to
review faults is to view the F/W History submenu under the Faults menu of the Setup Menu. Fault
conditions are grouped into several categories based upon where they are detected.
Each fault condition may be configured to be a fault, warning, or event:
1.
2.
3.
A fault condition brings the motor to a controlled stop at the park position, and subsequently
turns the motor off. The no fault status bit will be cleared. All faults are displayed on the
keypad and cause the keypad to flash. Faults are cleared when the fault reset request bit is
set.
Warnings do not shut off the drive. The drive proceeds as if nothing happened. The no
warning status bit is cleared to indicate a warning has occurred. Warnings are not displayed on
the keypad and do not cause the keypad to flash. Warnings are cleared when the warning
reset request bit is set.
Events do not shut off the drive. The drive proceeds as if nothing happened. Warnings are not
displayed on the keypad and do not cause the keypad to flash.
For each fault choose to classify it as only one: fault, warning or event. A fault condition cannot be
both a warning and a fault. If a fault condition is assigned as a both a fault and warning, the
warning mask and event mask will be cleared.
Assigning a fault condition to be fatal or warning fault is done within the fault menu. The drive
contains two sets of fault condition masks. The first mask set is used to enable a fault condition to
be fatal. The other mask set is used to enable a fault condition to be a warning. Each fault condition
has a bit within the mask that is set for enabling the condition, or cleared to disable the condition.
The Fault Masks menu is used to assign a fault condition to be fatal while the Warning Masks
menu is used to assign a fault condition to be a warning. See the section on faults in the hardware
manual for more information.
8.2.1
History
Fatal faults and warnings are stored in the F/W History submenu under the Faults menu. Events
are stored in the Event History submenu under the Faults menu. From the keypad, the History
menu is the simplest means of determining when a fatal or warning fault has occurred. The fault
history stores as many as 300 faults and warnings. The event history stores as many as 300
events. Each occurrence in the history contains information about when the fault occurred, if it was
a fatal or warning fault, and if it was a latched fault.
General Information
164
8.2.2
Fault Masks
Numerous fault masks may be monitored from the Global Dictionary. Each fault mask contains as
many as 32 fault condition bits, each of which represents a specific fault condition.
Table 8-1Fault Mask

Mask
Description
hdw mask 0
sfw mask 1
sfw mask 2
sfw mask 3
app mask 4
user mask 0
user mask 1
Indicates which fault conditions are enabled as fatal faults.

Each bit in the mask corresponds to a fault condition.
hdw warning mask 0

sfw warning mask 1
sfw warning mask 2
sfw warning mask 3
app warning mask 4
user warning mask 0
user warning mask 1
Indicates which fault conditions are enabled as warnings.

Each bit in the mask corresponds to a warning condition.
hdw event mask 0

sfw event mask 1
sfw event mask 2
sfw event mask 3
app event mask 4
user event mask 0
user event mask 1
Indicates which event conditions are enabled as events. Each

bit in the mask corresponds to an event condition.
hdw faults 0
sfw faults 1
sfw faults 2
sfw faults 3
app faults 4
user faults 0
user faults 1
Indicates which fault conditions have occurred. This mask

results from logically AND-ing the unmasked hardware with the
hardware mask. If a fault bit is not set in the hardware mask, a
fault condition will not generate a fatal fault. To decode the
value, FIN: 0 is bit 2^0 through FIN:31 which is bit 2^31. The
names for FIN:0-FIN:61 and FOUT:0-FOUT:31 can be found in
following tables.
hdw warning 0
sfw warning 1
sfw warning 2
sfw warning 3
app warning 4
user warning 0
user warning 1
Indicates which warning conditions have occurred. Multiple

warning condition bits will be set in the mask if multiple warning
conditions occur simultaneously.
hdw latch 0
sfw latched 1
sfw latched 2
sfw latched 3
sfw latched 4
user latched 0
user latched 1
Indicates which fault conditions caused the drive to shut off.

Multiple fault condition bits will be set in the mask if multiple
fault conditions occur simultaneously.
General Information
165
8.2.3
Hardware Faults
The fault conditions that the drive detects in hardware are described below in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2Hardware Faults

Bit
Event
FIN: 0
bus over
voltage
fault
yes
This fault indicates that the DC bus voltage has exceeded

the maximum allowable limit. This can occur if the drive
stops too quickly or the input power is too high. Try
increasing the decel time or enabling the Bus Regulator.
FIN: 1
AMB thermal
switch
fault
yes
This fault indicates that the ambient temperature of the drive

has exceeded 73 deg C. This can be caused if the cabinet
temperature is too high.
FIN: 5 fast overcurrent
fault
yes
This fault indicates that the instantaneous current of the

inverter has exceeded the maximum allowable limit. This
can indicate that there is an output shorted. If this fault
occurs consistently on starting from a dead stop, un-mask
this fault.
FIN: 6
fault
yes
This fault indicates that a thermal switch on the inverter heat

sink has opened due to elevated temperature. This is
normally the result of excessive ambient air temperature or
restricted air flow through the heat sink.
FIN: 8 gate driver dsat
fault
yes
Indicates that an excessive on-state voltage was detected

across the associated power transistors within inverter. This
fault could be caused by a short circuit or ground fault within
the motor or associated connections.
FIN: 14
ireg shutoff
fault
no
This fault indicates that the current regulator gate array

stopped functioning and the DSP did not detect a fault
signal. This may be caused by the gate array detecting
faults that were not latched. These faults most likely are
caused by noise on signals to the current regulator gate
array. This may be corrected by re-wiring the grounding of
the drive or by replacing the module with the current
regulator gate array.
FIN: 16
low voltage
supply
fault
yes
Indicates that an unacceptable voltage level was detected on

either the +15 or -15 DC power supplies within the inverter.
Check the operating DC power supply levels. Often
associated with a power up event and was latched as the
power was lost.
FIN: 17
external trip
none
yes
Not Used.
FIN: 18 dynamic brake

limit
fault
yes
This fault indicates the dynamic braking has been above the
duty cycle limit.
FIN: 19 watchdog timer
fault
no
This fault indicates that the software did not execute the
proper instruction sequence. A defective inverter control
module is a possible cause of repeated watchdog timer
faults.
FIN: 21 motor pg loss a none
no
This fault indicates that the motor socket encoder signals on

channel "a" do not have the proper differential signal levels.
Detection of this fault is enabled only if an incremental
encoder interface is connected.
FIN: 22 motor pg loss b none
no

channel "b" do not have the proper differential signal levels.
HS thermal
switch
Description
Default AutoState Restart
General Information
166
Bit
Event
FIN: 23
motor pg loss
m
none
no

channel "m" do not have the proper differential signal levels.
FIN: 25
load pg loss a
none
no
This fault indicates that the load socket encoder signals on

FIN: 26
load pg loss b
none
no

FIN: 27 load pg loss m
none
no

FIN: 29 follow pg loss a none
no

FIN: 30 follow pg loss b none
no

FIN: 31
no

follow pg loss
m
none
Description
General Information
167
8.2.4
Software Faults
The fault conditions that the drive detects in software are described below in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3Software Faults

Bit
Event
FIN: 32
motor marker
none
no
This fault indicates that an incorrect number of encoder

pulses were accumulated between two consecutive marker
pulses for the motor socket pulse generator. Detection of
this fault is enabled only if an incremental encoder interface
is connected.
FIN: 33
load marker
none
no

pulses for the load socket pulse generator. Detection of this
fault is enabled only if an incremental encoder interface is
connected.
FIN: 34
follow marker
none
no

pulses for the load socket pulse generator. Detection of this
fault is enabled only if an incremental encoder interface is
connected.
FIN: 35
overrun
fault
yes
This fault indicates the dsp microprocessor did not complete

all the time critical tasks in their allotted time.
FIN: 36 motor rms limit
fault
yes
This fault indicates that the RMS output current has

exceeded the level specified by the motor rms limit
parameter.
FIN: 37 circuit breaker
none
no
This fault indicates that the torque command has been

saturated at the torque limit for a time equal to 1.1 times the
longer of the acceleration or deceleration times.
FIN: 38
pos error
none
no
This fault indicates that position error has exceeded 1.25

times the maximum expected value. The maximum
expected position error is automatically calculated as a
function of the maximum velocity limit and drive tuning
parameters.
FIN: 39
bus
undervoltage
fault
yes
This fault indicates that the DC bus voltage has exceeded

the minimum allowable limit.
FIN: 40 motor fbk loss
none
no
This fault indicates that motors feedback velocity has

remained at zero for longer than a preset time delay after the
presence of a non-zero velocity command. The preset time
delay is automatically calculated as a function of the drive
tuning parameters.
FIN: 41
none
no
This fault indicates that loads feedback velocity has

remained at zero for longer than a preset time delay after the
presence of a non-zero velocity command. The preset time
delay is automatically calculated as a function of the drive
tuning parameters.
none
no
This fault indicates that after command velocity has been set
to zero, the motor feedback velocity has either not stopped
rotating within one second or has continued to rotate a
distance of one revolution.
load fbk loss
FIN: 42 motor runaway
Description
General Information
168
Bit
Event
FIN: 43
load runaway
none
no
This fault indicates that after command velocity has been set
to zero, the load feedback velocity has either not stopped
rotating within one second or has continued to rotate a
distance of one revolution.
FIN: 44
non volatile
mem
fault
no
A circular redundancy check (CRC) is done on all setup

parameters and other data stored in non volatile memory
during the power-up sequence. This fault indicates that
check has detected corrupted data the drives default setup
parameters were loaded. It is possible for this fault to occur
the first time that power is applied to the drive after
upgrading the program to a newer version. Subsequent fault
may indicate a defective non volatile memory or inverter
control module. Storing data parameter values to flash
memory in the Archive Menu, choosing no to Default and
yes to Recall provides automatic recovery from this event.
FIN: 45
rtc takeover
none
no
This fault indicates that the externally generated real time

clock (RTC) was lost and the internally generated RTC took
control of the signal.
FIN: 46
fbk circuit
breaker
none
no
This fault indicates that a DC drive fed from a DC bus. This

fault occurs when the feedback torque is within the tolerance
and time limit of the feedback fault. Normally this is not
used.
FIN: 47
ssi receive
none
no
This fault indicates that a fault occurred on the ssi serial link.
FIN: 48
inverter rms
fault
no
This fault indicates that the RMS output current has

exceeded the level specified by the maximum current
parameter.
FIN: 49
sync receive
none
no
This fault indicates that synchronous serial link had a fault.

The fault is generated if the drives real time clock is not
synchronized to the serial links packet.
FIN: 50
armature curr
error
none
no
This fault indicates that the dc feedback differs from

command.
FIN: 51
field current
loss
fault
no
This fault indicates that the field current is less than 10

percent of rated field current for 20 msec.
FIN: 52 overspeed trip
none
no
Not currently used in this application.
FIN: 54 sync data error
none
no
This fault indicates that synchronous serial link received bad

data. The fault is generated if the size of the packet is
incorrect or the crc on the data is incorrect.
FIN: 55
optomux
timeout
none
no
FIN: 56
unknown fbk
module
none
no
This fault indicates that drive does not recognize the

feedback module plugged into the inverter control module.
FIN: 57
reserved
none
no
FIN: 58 communication
error
none
no
This fault indicates that dynlink master did not communicate

with the drive for a time interval greater than the setup
dynlink timeout.
FIN: 59 torque reg error
fault
no
Torque regulator error. This fault indicates that the torque

regulator output torque has exceeded the torque regulator
error limit. This fault may not be used if setups for the fault
do not exist.
FIN: 60
fault
no
Contact Unico.
UEdit Fault
Description
General Information
169
Bit
Event
FIN: 61
firmware error
fault
no
Contact Unico.
FIN: 62
output phase
loss
fault
no
This fault detects phase imbalance.
FIN: 64
pos error
ewarn
none
no
FIN: 65
motor rms
ewarn
none
no
FIN: 66 thermal switch

ewarn
none
no
FIN: 67 obsync receive
none
no
FIN: 68
obsync data
error
none
no
FIN: 69
identification
error
fault
no
This fault indicates that the controller has read a different ID

(horsepower rating) since the pervious power up. It might
imply the controller has been moved to a different drive or
the cable that reads the ID is not connected. This fault can
only be reset if the controller reads the original
corresponding ID or the non-volatile memory is defaulted or
the Reset ID utility is used from the Archive Menu.
FIN: 83
anybus 1
fault
no
FIN: 89
abs ref
none
no
Description
General Information
170
8.2.5
Application Faults
The fault conditions that the drive detects in the application are described below in Table 8-3.
Table 8-4Application Faults

Bit
Event
Description
FIN: 128 br phase loss

fault
fault
no
Software phase loss detection.
FIN: 129
fault
yes
FIN: 130 motor thermal

switch
fault
yes
FIN: 131 motor blower

off
fault
yes
FIN: 132 bus reg tol time
fault
no
Bus regulator error.
FIN: 133 bus reg tol vel
fault
no
Bus regulator error.
FIN: 135 external stop
fault
yes
If digital in 0 select = EXTERNAL STOP, fault indicator

based on input value. Set up logic polarity, fault detection
delay and restart delay in the Digital I/O Menu.
FIN: 136
user 1
fault
yes
If digital in 5 select = USER FLT 1, fault indicator based on

input value. Set up logic polarity, fault detection delay and
restart delay in the Digital I/O Menu.
FIN: 137
user 2
fault
yes

FIN: 138
user 3
fault
yes

FIN: 139
user 4
fault
yes

FIN: 140
low prs flow
fault
yes
If digital in 7 select = LOW PRS FLOW, fault indicator based

on input value. Set up logic polarity, fault detection delay
and restart delay in the Digital I/O Menu.
FIN: 141
high prs
fault
yes
If digital in 8 select = HIGH PRS, fault indicator based on

FIN: 142
fluid flow
auto-set
yes
If fluid flow source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on

input value. Set up warning and fault detection ranges, fault
detection delay and restart delay in the Signals In Menu.
Latches: fluid flow value
FIN: 143
gas flow
auto-set
yes
If gas flow source is not DISABLED, fault indicator based on

Latches: gas flow value
FIN: 147
Not Used
FIN: 148
auto off jog

stop
fault
yes
If digital in 6 select = AUTO OFF JOG SWITCH, fault

indicator based on input value. Set up logic polarity, fault
detection delay and restart delay in the Digital I/O Menu.
ehalt
General Information
171
Bit
Event
FIN: 149
casing prs
FIN: 150
Description
auto-set
yes
If casing prs source is not KEYPAD, fault indicator based on

Latches: casing prs value
casing temp auto-set
yes
If casing temp source is not DISABLED, fault indicator based

on input value. Set up warning and fault detection ranges,
fault detection delay and restart delay in the Signals In
Menu.
Latches: casing temp value
FIN: 151
tubing prs
auto-set
yes
If tubing prs source is not KEYPAD, fault indicator based on

Latches: tubing prs value
FIN: 152
tubing temp
auto-set
yes
If tubing temp source is not DISABLED, fault indicator based

Menu.
Latches: tubing temp value
FIN: 153
intake prs
auto-set
yes
If intake prs source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based

Menu.
Latches: intake prs value
FIN: 154 discharge prs auto-set
yes
If discharge prs source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator

based on input value. Set up warning and fault detection
ranges, fault detection delay and restart delay in the Signals
In Menu.
Latches: discharge prs value
FIN: 155
user A
auto-set
yes
If user A source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on

Latches: user A value
FIN: 156
user B
auto-set
yes
If user B source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on

Latches: user B value
FIN: 157
user C
auto-set
yes
If user C source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on

Latches: user C value
FIN: 158
temp 1
auto-set
yes
If temp 1 source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on

Latches: temp 1 value
FIN: 159
temp 2
auto-set
yes
If temp 2 source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on

Latches: temp 2 value
General Information
172
8.2.6
User Faults
The fault conditions that the drive detects in software that are defined in UEdit are described below
in Table 8-5User Faults.
Table 8-5User Faults

Bit
Event
FOUT: 1
low speed
Description
yes
Excessive motor speed fault indicator.

Latches: pump average spm, pump spm monitor, SRP motor
vel rpm
FOUT: 2 negative torque negative

torq
mask
yes
Excessive negative torque fault indicator.

Latches: crank torque monitor
FOUT: 3
low rod load
low rod
load
mask
yes
Low rod load fault indicator.

Latches: rod load monitor
FOUT: 4
start event
event
no
Indicates that the motor has started.
FOUT: 5
stop event
event
no
Indicates that the motor has stopped.
event
yes
Indicates that the reference sensor is either not functioning

or being received at the incorrect time.
FOUT: 7 pstandby event event
no
Indicates that the pumping unit has temporarily stopped by

the POC Controller and will restart once POC off time has
expired. Set up the POC Controller in the Control Menu .
Latches: pump average spm, pump fill monitor, liquid fill
monitor, gas fill monitor, speed mode select, optimize state
FOUT: 8 max fault event event
no
Indicates that there are no more auto-restarts allowed. The

allowable restart attempts has been used. Operator
intervention required.
FOUT: 9 power up event event
no
Indicates that drive has been powered up.

Latches: hdw faults 0 , sfw faults 1, sfw faults 2, , app faults
4, user faults 0, user faults 1, power off date, power off time
FOUT: 6 reference loss
low
speed
mask
FOUT: 10
FOUT: 11
FOUT: 12 timed event 1
timed
event 1
mask
no
Simple timed data-logger that latches data. Set up the

Timed Event in the Fault/Event Menu .
Latches: pump average spm, fluid flow monitor, liquid fill
monitor, gas fill monitor, fluid over pump monitor, casing
pressure
FOUT: 13 gauge event
event
no
Simple gauging data-logger that latches every 24 hours at

gauge time.
Latches: gauge run time, gauge fluid production, gauge
leakage, gauge avg fill, gauge avg spm, gauge energy
consumption, gauge strokes, gauge POC count
FOUT: 14
high torque
high torq
mask
yes
Excessive motor torque fault indicator.

Latches: crank torque monitor
FOUT: 15
password
event
none
no
If drive is password protected, detects password level entry.

Latches: lockout status, lockout time
General Information
173
Bit
Event
Description
FOUT: 6 reference error
ref
adjust
mask
no
Not used
FOUT: 18 auto flt reset

event
event
no
The auto-restart function issued a fault reset request.

Latches: hdw faults 0 , sfw faults 1, sfw faults 2, sfw faults 3,
app faults 4, user faults 0, user faults 1
FOUT: 19 operator reset

event
event
no
The STANDBY/RUN switch has been switched to a new

position. The controller has issued a fault-reset request.
TB1-21--Hand Mode Enable has changed state.
TB1-22--Auto Mode Enable has changed state.
TB1-23--Run Enable has changed state.
FOUT: 20
event
no
Not used
FOUT: 25 dwell end event event
no
Not used
FOUT: 26 SDO optimize

event
event
no
The SINGLE/DUAL/OPTIMIZE switch has been moved to

the optimize position.
FOUT: 27
SDO dual
event
event
no

the dual position.
FOUT: 28
SDO single
event
event
no

the single position.
FOUT: 29 SDO default

event
event
no
The input from the SINGLE/DUAL/OPTIMIZE switch has

been lost.
high rod
load
mask
yes
If high rod load mask is not set to NONE, fault indicator

based on rod load monitor. Set up detection level, fault
detection delay and restart delay in the Fault/Event Menu.
This fault is also disabled during the Well ID and Valve
Check Test.
Latches: rod load monitor
event
yes*
The remote run enable parameter has changed states.
FOUT: 30
dwell event
high load
FOUT: 31 remote event
*If the motor is on, as soon as the remote run enable

parameter is ENABLE, the drive will start if both motor on-Digital Input 11 in TB1-23 and run enableDigital Input 10 in
TB1-22 are asserted (STANDBY/RUN switch is in the RUN
position. If the motor is on and remote run enable is
disabled, drive will STOP and running status will display
REMOTE STOP. Not a part of the auto-restart function.
FOUT: 32 position error
fault
fault
yes
Indicates that the drive has detected excessive position

error-error. This might be caused by the unit binding (or
collision), or the snug auto pos error parameter setting too
small.
FOUT: 33 velocity error

fault
fault
yes
Indicates that the drive has detected excessive velocity

error-error. This might be caused by the unit binding (or
collision), or the snug auto vel error parameter setting too
small.
General Information
174
Bit
Event
Description
FOUT: 34 max gearbox

torque fault
fault
yes
Indicates that the drive has detected excessive gearbox

torque. This might be caused by the unit binding (or
collision), or the snug auto max gearbox torq parameter
setting too small.
FOUT: 35 min gearbox

torque fault
fault
yes
Indicates that the drive has detected low gearbox torque.

This might be caused by the unit binding (or collision), or the
snug auto min gearbox torq parameter setting too large.
FOUT: 37 gen warning
warning
no
Warning status for the generator .
FOUT: 38 gen start fault
fault
no
Starting fault status for the generator .
FOUT: 39 gen run fault
fault
no
Starting fault status for the generator .
FOUT: 41 a well status

error
event
no
A Well status.
FOUT: 42 a well comm

error
event
no
A Well status.
FOUT: 43 zenith comm

error
event
no
Zenith status.
FOUT: 44 modbus comm

error
event
no
Modbus status.
FOUT: 45
snug fault
event
yes
Indicates that the control attemted to snug upon starting, but

the motor never stopped turning. This is likely a mechanical
problem or excessive counterbalance pressure. Try reducing
snug torque limit.
FOUT: 46
power loss
control
event
yes
Indicates that a power loss condition has been detected by

the power loss control (the bus voltage has dropped below
the power loss bus level value).
FOUT: 47
power loss
parked
event
yes
Indicates that the power loss control has successfully parked

the unit upon losing power. However, absence of this event
does not necessarily indicate that the unit did not
successfully park upon power loss.
FOUT: 48 optimz cycle
event
FOUT: 57 low rod span
low rod
span
mask
yes
Low rod span fault indicator.

Latches: rod load span
FOUT: 58 low pump load
low
pump
load
mask
yes
Low pump load fault indicator.

Latches: pump load monitor
FOUT: 59
fault latch
event
event
no
Simple data-logger to latch drive and motor data in the event

of any fault. Used to troubleshoot.
FOUT: 60
high speed
high
speed
mask
yes
Excessive motor speed fault indicator.

Latches: pump average spm, pump spm monitor, SRP motor
vel rpm
Inicates that the Optimizer Cycle Mode has executed a fluid

pull down cycle, whereby the pump fill was pulled down to
the optimz cycle fill value (a periodic event).
General Information
175
Bit
Event
FOUT: 61 valve check

event

event
no
Description
A Valve Check test has been completed.
Latches: valve check auto
tv static leak rate
sv static leak rate
meas plunger clearance
valve check dwell spm
FOUT: 62 optimizer id
data
event
no
Simple data-logger that latches data for the Optimizer ID

Routine. Set up the Optimizer ID in the Optimizert Menu .
Latches: pump average spm, fluid flow monitor, liquid fill
monitor, gas fill monitor, fluid over pump monitor, casing
pressure
FOUT: 63 well id event
none
no
Simple event logger indicating that a Well ID Test has been

performed.
General Information
176
Index
100MHz Compact Control Module............ 18, 36, 147, 148
air bal prs value .......................................................64, 153
100MHz Control Module ........................................... 18, 36
air balance .........................................................63, 64, 153
4-20 mA Sensor Inputs ................................................... 22
air pump cylinder count ...........................................64, 153
a well address ............................................................... 148
air pump diameter ...................................................64, 153
a well comm error event................................................ 175
air pump force value ........................................................64
a well comm fault .......................................................... 149
air pump max pressure............................................64, 153
a well error timer ........................................................... 149
air pump prs max...................................................113, 154
a well packets ............................................................... 149
air pump prs max volts ..........................................114, 154
a well poll rate ............................................................... 148
air pump prs min....................................................113, 153
A Well Protocol ............................................................... 19
air pump prs min volts ...........................................114, 154
a well read count........................................................... 149
air pump prs source...............................................113, 153
a well retries.................................................................. 149
air pump prs value...........................................64, 114, 154
a well status .......................................................... 149, 175
AMB thermal switch fault...............................................166
a well status error event................................................ 175
ambient temperature .....................................................166
a well timeout ................................................................ 148
Analog Common..............................................................22
About the Manual............................................................ 10
Analog Input Terminals .............................................21, 22
abs ref fault ................................................................... 170
Analog Interface Module ... 13, 21, 23, 112, 113, 114, 115,
116, 117, 118, 119, 121, 122, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128,
129, 130, 131, 135, 136, 137, 138, 153, 154
ac fast multiple ........................................................ 35, 106

ac multiple............................................................... 35, 106
AC Test Utility 30, 101, 102, 103, 105, 108, 152, 153, 159,
160, 163
Analog Out Menu ..........................................................134

Analog Output Terminals.................................................21
accel time...................................................................... 104
Analog Utility ...................................................................35
actune mode ................................................................. 163
ANSI Protocol ..................................................19, 146, 147
ADC down max ............................................................. 112
Anybus ............................................................................19
ADC down max volts..................................................... 112
anybus 1 fault ................................................................170
ADC down min .............................................................. 112
Anybus Module ............................................................19
ADC down min volts...................................................... 112
aoj stop input .................................................................140
ADC down spm ....................................................... 51, 112
aoj stop restart delay .....................................................140
ADC up max.................................................................. 111
aoj stop restart override.................................................140
ADC up max volts ......................................................... 111
aoj stop time ..................................................................140
ADC up min................................................................... 111
API cntrweight value................................................63, 160
ADC up min volts .......................................................... 111
API fluid load ...................................................................71
ADC up spm............................................................ 50, 111
API fluid load, maximum..................................................71
Addressing Dictionary Items, see Network Map ............. 36
API max fluid load ...............................................54, 71, 79
air bal prs value............................................................ 113
API pump stroke ..............................................................43
air bal cmprssn ratio.......................................... 63, 79, 153
app faults 4 ............................................................173, 174
air bal cylinder count ....................................................... 63
Application Description....................................................13
air bal diameter ....................................................... 63, 153
Application Features........................................................14
air bal force ..................................................................... 64
Application Overview.......................................................12
air bal prs fault time....................................................... 113
Application Wiring............................................................17
air bal prs max ...................................................... 112, 153
Archiving Parameters ..............................................32, 169
air bal prs max fault....................................................... 113
armature curr error fault ................................................169
air bal prs max volts .............................................. 113, 153
Attention Symbol .............................. 7, 8, 9, 11, 17, 30, 31
air bal prs max warning................................................. 113
auto enable input .......................................................40, 86
air bal prs min ....................................................... 112, 153
auto flt reset event.........................................................174
air bal prs min fault........................................................ 113
auto high trigger ..............................................................53
air bal prs min volts ............................................... 113, 153
auto low trigger ................................................................53
air bal prs min warning.................................................. 113
Auto Mode ...............................................................21, 174
air bal prs restart delay ................................................. 113
auto off jog (aoj) stop fault.............................................171
air bal prs source .................................................. 112, 153
General Information
Index
177
Auto Restarts ..... 15, 49, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 113, 115, 116,
118, 119, 120, 122, 123, 124, 126, 127, 128, 130, 131,
132, 173, 174
casing prs source .... 67, 94, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 153,
154, 172
auto restarts, Feature List ............................................... 49
casing temp fault ...........................................................172
auto rod frict offset .......................................................... 78
casing temp fault time ...................................................116
auto rod friction ............................................................... 78
casing temp max ...........................................................115
auto rod friction enable ....................... 70, 75, 78, 156, 160
casing temp max fault ...................................................116
casing prs value ................................................91, 94, 172
AUTO RUN ............................................................... 40, 86
casing temp max volts...................................................115
auto trigger................................................................ 14, 49
casing temp max warning..............................................116
Auto-restart ............................................................... 40, 86
casing temp min ............................................................115
average perf depth.................................................... 67, 73
casing temp min fault ....................................................116
avg perf depth ................................................................. 72
casing temp min volts....................................................115
back-light......................................................................... 29
casing temp restart delay ..............................................116
balance action................................................................. 75
casing temp rtu word .....................................................116
balance monitor ........................................................ 43, 75
casing temp source .......................................................172
base rpm ......................................... 99, 101, 103, 152, 159
casing temp value ...........................................92, 116, 172
blank display ................................................................... 28
casing valve cmd .............................................................94
Bluetooth Module ............................................................ 13
casing valve control .........................................................94
br phase loss enable............................................. 110, 171
casing valve controller.....................................................49
br phase loss fault................................................. 110, 171
Casing Valve Controller.............................................93, 94
Brake............................................................................. 142
Chart Display ...................................................................37
brake motor on delay .................................................... 104
Chart Recorder Utility, UEdit.........................................14
bridle control ............................................................. 49, 81
Clear Event Masks ..........................................................26
bridle control enable.................................................. 16, 81
Clear Fault ...........................................................26, 29, 34
bridle rod load ................................................................. 81
Clear Fault History...........................................................26
Bridle Separation Controller...................................... 16, 81
Clear Fault Masks ...........................................................26
bubble point pressure ..................................................... 73
Clear Warning Masks ......................................................26
bus capacitance ............................................................ 110
clock frequency .......................................................35, 106
bus overvoltage fault..................................................... 166
Clock Utility......................................................................35
bus reg tol time fault...................................................... 171
Comm Menu ..............................................................32, 39
bus reg tol vel fault........................................................ 171
communication error fault..............................................169
Bus Regulator ............................................... 110, 166, 171
console address ............................................................146
bus undervoltage fault................................................... 168
console baud rate ..........................................................146
bus voltage.............................................. 86, 110, 166, 171
console checksum .........................................................146
calc gearbox efficiency.................................................... 59
console parity ................................................................146
calc rotary inertia............................................................. 64
Console Port........................................................20, 36, 37
calendar .......................................................................... 35
Console Port Units ..........................................................39
calendar control .............................................................. 49
console pos units...........................................................146
Calendar Controller........................... 16, 40, 49, 86, 88, 89
console protocol ........................... 146, 148, 149, 150, 151
Calendar Menu ......................................................... 49, 88
console rtu gap ..............................................................146
Calendar Utility................................................................ 36
console term size ..........................................................146
CALENDAR WAIT .................................................... 40, 86
console term type ..........................................................146
calibrate analog select .................................................. 111
console units ...........................................................39, 146
calibrate analog set............................................... 111, 112
console vel units............................................................146
calibrate max volts ........................................................ 111
Control and Optional Modules.. 13, 79, 135, 136, 137, 138
calibrate min volts ......................................................... 111
Control Menu ...........................................................81, 173
casing inner diameter................................................ 67, 72
control troubleshooter......................................................81
casing pressure............................................... 67, 173, 176
counterweight value ................................................63, 161
casing pressure source............................................. 67, 94
crank torque monitor ...............................................59, 173
casing prs fault.............................................................. 172
csg keypad low req..........................................................93
casing prs fault time ...................................................... 115
csg prs req source...........................................................93
casing prs max warning ................................................ 115
csg valve control........................................................93, 94
casing prs restart delay................................................. 115
csg valve ki ......................................................................93
General Information
Index
178
csg valve kp .................................................................... 93
dac 6 mul .......................................................................138
csg valve off pulse .......................................................... 93
dac 6 output...................................................................138
csg valve on pulse .......................................................... 93
dac 6 ptr ........................................................................137
csg valve pwm level ........................................................ 94
dac 6 select ........................................ 24, 93, 94, 137, 138
csg valve pwm tol............................................................ 94
dac clock level ...............................................................134
csg valve test cmd .......................................................... 93
Data Collection ................................................................15
cumulative run hours....................................................... 43
Data Output .....................................................................15
current limit ................................................................... 103
Data Recall ......................................................................33
Current Modulation ....................................................... 107
Data Sampler ..................................................................15
dac 1 abs ...................................................................... 134
Data Sampler Utility, UEdit ...........................................14
dac 1 auto scale............................................................ 134
Data Store .......................................................................33
dac 1 div........................................................................ 134
date and time.................................................35, 44, 88, 89
dac 1 item ..................................................................... 134
date range enable sts......................................................89
dac 1 mul ...................................................................... 134
Date, setting of ....................................................36, 88, 89
dac 1 output .................................................................. 134
day and night operation.................................16, 40, 86, 88
dac 1 ptr ........................................................................ 134
day end............................................................................88
dac 1 select................................................. 22, 93, 94, 134
day start...........................................................................88
dac 2 abs ...................................................................... 135
daylight savings time .......................................................88
dac 2 auto scale............................................................ 135
db percent used...............................................................83
dac 2 div........................................................................ 135
db power..........................................................................82
dac 2 item ..................................................................... 134
db resistance ...........................................................82, 152
dac 2 mul ...................................................................... 135
db time constant ......................................................82, 101
dac 2 output .................................................................. 135
db watts ...................................................................82, 152
dac 2 ptr ........................................................................ 134
DC Power Supply Outputs ........................................21, 22
dac 2 select......................................... 22, 93, 94, 134, 135
dead zone........................................................................77
dac 3 abs ...................................................................... 136
decel time ..............................................................104, 166
dac 3 auto scale............................................................ 135
Decimal Point Key ...........................................................26
dac 3 div........................................................................ 135
Defaulting Parameters.....................................................33
dac 3 item ..................................................................... 135
Delete Key .......................................................................26
dac 3 mul ...................................................................... 135
diagnostics ......................................................................35
dac 3 output .................................................................. 136
Diagnostics Utilities .........................................................29
dac 3 ptr ........................................................................ 135
Dictionary ..................................................................29, 36
dac 3 select......................................... 24, 93, 94, 135, 136
Digital I/O.........................................................................21
dac 4 abs ...................................................................... 136
Digital I/O Menu...............................................21, 139, 171
dac 4 auto scale............................................................ 136
digital in 0 select..............................................21, 139, 171
dac 4 div........................................................................ 136
digital in 1 select......................................................21, 139
dac 4 item ..................................................................... 136
dac 4 mul ...................................................................... 136
dac 4 output .................................................................. 136
digital in 4 select................................................21, 85, 139
dac 4 ptr ........................................................................ 136
digital in 5 select..................................... 21, 139, 140, 171
dac 4 select................................................. 24, 93, 94, 136
digital in 6 select..............................................21, 140, 171
dac 5 abs ...................................................................... 137
digital in 7 select.............................................................21
dac 5 auto scale............................................................ 137
digital in 7 select............................................140, 141, 171
dac 5 div........................................................................ 137
digital in 8 select............................................141, 142, 171
dac 5 item ..................................................................... 137
Digital Inputs............................. 21, 35, 139, 140, 141, 142
dac 5 mul ...................................................................... 137
digital out 0 select....................................................21, 142
dac 5 output .................................................................. 137
dac 5 ptr ........................................................................ 137
dac 5 select......................................... 24, 93, 94, 136, 137
dac 6 abs ...................................................................... 138
dac 6 auto scale............................................................ 138
dac 6 div........................................................................ 138
digital out x select......................................................93, 94
dac 6 item ..................................................................... 137
Digital Outputs .....................................................21, 35, 86
General Information
Index
179
DISABLED ................................................................ 40, 86
dsv vbus filter ................................................................110
discharge prs fault......................................................... 172
dsv wn d ........................................................................108
discharge prs fault time................................................. 124
dsv wn q ........................................................................108
discharge prs max......................................................... 123
Dual Speed Mode............................................................15
discharge prs max fault................................................. 124
dynacard load offset ..................................................75, 78
discharge prs max volts ................................................ 123
Dynacard Menu ...............................................................77
discharge prs max warning ........................................... 124
dynacard tilt offset ...........................................................78
discharge prs min.......................................................... 123
DynaCards ................................................................14, 37
discharge prs min fault.................................................. 124
DynaCards, calibrating appearance ..........................77, 78
discharge prs min volts ................................................. 123
dynamic brake limit fault................................................166
discharge prs restart delay............................................ 124
dynamic surface filter ......................................................77
discharge prs rtu word .................................................. 124
editing parameter values .................................................30
discharge prs source..................................... 123, 124, 172
ehalt fault .......................................................................171
discharge prs value............................................... 124, 172
emulate 2x24 LCD.........................................................144
Discrete I/O ................................................................... 139
Enhanced Oil Production........................ 90, 91, 92, 93, 94
Display ............................................................................ 25
Enter Key.........................................................................26
Display Menu .......................................................... 39, 143
enumerated parameters ..................................................30
down maximum spm ......................................... 50, 57, 155
Enumerated Parameters .................................................39
down position .................................................... 61, 74, 156
eop casing max prs .........................................................91
down speed source................................................. 51, 112
eop casing min prs ..........................................................91
downhole tilt offset .......................................................... 78
eop casing pressure ..................................................91, 92
drive current date ............................................................ 88
eop casing temp ..............................................................92
drive current day ............................................................. 88
EOP controller .................................................................49
drive current day of week................................................ 88
eop critical pressure ........................................................92
drive current month ......................................................... 88
EOP Menu .......................................................................90
drive current time ............................................................ 88
eop min temp diff .............................................................92
Drive Identity ................................................................... 28
eop mode ......................................................90, 91, 92, 93
Drive Menu.................................................................... 103
eop mtd pressure ............................................................92
Drive Menu Protocol ....................................................... 19
eop optimal pressure .......................................................93
drive model ................................................... 103, 106, 152
eop pause start................................................................90
drive multiple........................................................... 35, 106
eop pause timer...............................................................90
Drive Reg Menu ...................................................... 35, 106
eop phase 0 time .............................................................90
Drive Size........................................................................ 28
eop phase 0 timer............................................................90
Drive Test........................................................................ 30
eop phase 1 time .............................................................90
drv motor troubleshooter............................................... 105
eop phase 1 timer............................................................90
dsv bus correction......................................................... 110
eop phase 2 dwell time....................................................91
dsv deadtime percent.................................................... 109
eop phase 2 dwell timer ..................................................91
dsv ki err d .................................................................... 109
eop phase 2 settle time ...................................................91
dsv ki err q .................................................................... 109
eop phase 2 settle timer ..................................................91
dsv kp cmd d................................................................. 109
eop phase 2 time .............................................................91
dsv kp cmd pct d ........................................................... 108
eop phase 2 timer............................................................91
dsv kp cmd pct q ........................................................... 109
eop phase 3 time .............................................................91
dsv kp cmd q................................................................. 109
eop phase 3 timer............................................................91
dsv kp fbk d........................................................... 108, 109
eop point 1.......................................................................92
dsv kp fbk q................................................................... 109
eop point 2.......................................................................92
dsv kv percent............................................................... 108
eop point 3.......................................................................92
dsv L linking .................................................................. 108
eop powerup mode..........................................................90
dsv Ld ........................................................................... 108
eop prs accum .................................................................92
dsv Lq ........................................................................... 108
eop prs increment............................................................92
dsv synchronized .......................................................... 108
eop select ..................................................................90, 91
dsv v boost.................................................................... 110
eop state..........................................................................90
dsv v limit percent ......................................................... 109
eop status ........................................................................90
dsv vbus cutoff .............................................................. 110
eop temp accum ..............................................................92
General Information
Index
180
eop temp difference ........................................................ 92
fill pot max .....................................................................133
eop tubing max prs ......................................................... 91
fill pot max volts .............................................................133
eop tubing min prs .......................................................... 91
fill pot min ......................................................................133
eop tubing pressure ........................................................ 91
fill pot min volts ..............................................................133
eop tubing temp .............................................................. 92
fill pot source .................................................133, 158, 159
eop valve max................................................................. 92
fill pot value ...........................................................133, 159
eop valve min.................................................................. 92
fill simulation mode ........................................133, 158, 159
eop valve setpoint ........................................................... 92
fill source .............................................................53, 54, 79
EOP Controller .................................... 90, 91, 92, 93, 94
fill trigger mode ..........................................................14, 53
ESP Protocol................................................................... 19
firmware error fault ........................................................170
Event History..................................................... 30, 31, 164
flashing display................................................................29
Event Masks ............................................................. 30, 31
flow frctn gain ............................................................77, 78
Event Masks, clear.......................................................... 26
Fluid.................................................................................77
Event Masks, set............................. 26, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100
fluid avg flow monitor...................................57, 70, 71, 162
Event Masks, viewing ................................................... 165
fluid cmprssn gain ...........................................................77
external down spm.................................................. 51, 112
fluid fill monitor ..........................................................42, 53
external stop fault.......................................................... 171
fluid flow fault.................................................................171
external stop input......................................................... 139
fluid flow fault time .........................................................120
external stop restart delay............................................. 139
fluid flow max.................................................................119
external stop restart override ........................................ 139
fluid flow max fault.........................................................120
external stop time.......................................................... 139
fluid flow max volts ........................................................119
external trip fault ........................................................... 166
fluid flow max warning ...................................................120
external up spm ...................................................... 51, 112
fluid flow min..................................................................119
fast overcurrent fault ..................................................... 166
fluid flow min fault ..........................................................120
Fault .................................................................... 26, 29, 34
fluid flow min volts .........................................................119
Fault and Warning History ................................ 30, 31, 164
fluid flow monitor .......... 42, 57, 70, 71, 120, 162, 173, 176
Fault Conditions, viewing .............................................. 165
fluid flow restart delay....................................................120
Fault Display ................................................................... 29
fluid flow rtu word ..........................................................120
fault latch event............................................................. 175
fluid flow source.............................................119, 120, 171
Fault Masks............................................................... 30, 31
fluid flow units ..........................................................39, 143
Fault Masks, auto. 113, 115, 116, 118, 119, 120, 122, 123,
124, 126, 127, 128, 129, 131, 132
fluid flow value .......................................................120, 171
Fault Masks, clear........................................................... 26
fluid level monitor ......................................................42, 70
Fault Masks, set.............................. 26, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100
fluid level offset..........................................................42, 70
Fault Masks, viewing..................................................... 165
fluid over pump monitor...................... 42, 70, 79, 173, 176
Fault Menu ........................................................ 30, 31, 164
fluid production meter ..........................................42, 43, 71
fault reset input ............................................................. 139
fluid viscosity ...................................................................70
FAULT RESTART..................................................... 40, 86
follow marker fault .........................................................168
fault restart delay .... 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 139, 140, 141, 142
follow pg loss a fault ......................................................167
Fault, clearing ..................................................... 40, 49, 86
follow pg loss b fault ......................................................167
Fault/Event Menu............................................ 95, 173, 174
follow pg loss m fault .....................................................167
FAULTED.................................................................. 40, 86
FULL PUMP ..................................................................162
fbk circuit breaker fault.................................................. 169
Function Key .............................................................26, 29
Feature List Menu ........................................................... 49
gas fill monitor .......................................... 42, 53, 173, 176
feedback transducers.............................. 35, 106, 107, 159
gas flow fault .................................................................171
Feedback Utility .............................................................. 35
gas flow fault time..........................................................122
field current ........................................................... 101, 104
gas flow max .................................................................121
field current loss fault .................................................... 169
gas flow max fault..........................................................121
file on demand wpr.......................................................... 79
gas flow max volts .........................................................121
file state........................................................................... 79
gas flow max warning....................................................121
file timed wpr................................................................... 79
gas flow min ..................................................................121
fill high trigger...................................................... 53, 54, 79
gas flow min fault...........................................................121
fill low trigger ....................................................... 53, 54, 79
gas flow min volts ..........................................................121
fluid level calibrate.....................................................42, 70
General Information
Index
181
gas flow monitor...................................................... 42, 121
gen start fault.................................................................175
gas flow restart delay .................................................... 122
gen warning ...................................................................175
gas flow rtu word........................................................... 121
Generator ............................................. 40, 85, 86, 87, 175
gas flow source ............. 42, 43, 44, 45, 120, 121, 122, 171
generator control .............................................................85
gas flow units .......................................................... 39, 143
generator diagnostic........................................................85
gas flow value ....................................................... 121, 171
generator flt input ....................................................85, 139
GAS IN PUMP .............................................................. 162
generator maint hours .....................................................86
Gas Powered Lift ................................................ 85, 86, 87
generator max pwr ..........................................................85
gas production meter ...................................................... 43
generator max speed ......................................................85
gate driver dsat fault ..................................................... 166
Generator Menu ..............................................................85
gauge avg fill........................................................... 44, 173
generator min speed .......................................................85
gauge avg fill accum ....................................................... 45
generator pwr gain ..........................................................85
gauge avg spm ....................................................... 44, 173
generator run hours .........................................................85
gauge avg spm accum.................................................... 45
generator spd ramp .........................................................85
gauge energy consumption..................................... 45, 173
generator spd req ............................................................85
gauge event .................................................................. 173
generator state ................................................................85
gauge fluid flow ............................................................... 44
generator troubleshooter .................................................87
gauge fluid production............................................. 44, 173
GLCD Display..........................................................25, 144
gauge fluid production accum ......................................... 45
GLCD Display Menu Navigation................................28, 29
gauge gas production ..................................................... 44
Global Dictionary .......................................................35, 36
gauge gas production accum.......................................... 45
GPL System...................................... 40, 85, 86, 87, 175
gauge leakage ........................................................ 44, 173
Graph Display..................................................................37
gauge leakage accum..................................................... 45
Graphics Display .......................................................13, 14
Gauge Menu ................................................................... 44
hand enable input......................................................40, 86
gauge oil production........................................................ 44
Hand Mode ..............................................................21, 174
gauge oil production accum ............................................ 45
HAND RUN ...............................................................40, 86
gauge POC count ......................................................... 173
Hardware Requirements .................................................13
gauge POC count accum................................................ 45
hdw faults 0 ...........................................................173, 174
gauge power meter ......................................................... 44
heat sink thermal switch fault ........................................166
gauge power meter accum ............................................. 45
Help Display ..............................................................35, 36
gauge run time ........................................................ 44, 173
Help Utilities ....................................................................35
gauge run time accum .................................................... 45
Help Utility .......................................................................29
gauge strokes ............................................................... 173
hertz units ................................................................39, 143
gauge strokes accum...................................................... 45
hexadecimal parameters .................................................30
gauge time ........................................................ 29, 44, 173
high prs fault ..................................................................171
gauge troubleshooter ...................................................... 45
high prs input .................................................................141
gauge water production .................................................. 44
high prs restart delay.....................................................142
gauge water production accum....................................... 45
high prs time ..................................................................142
Gauged Statistics.............................................. 15, 29, 173
high rod load fault..............................................95, 96, 174
Gauging Data...................................................... 15, 44, 45
high rod load mask ............................................96, 97, 174
Gauging, Well Statistics .................................................. 15
high rod load restart delay ...............................................97
GB TORQ FAULT ........................................................... 62
high rod load start............................................................96
GB TORQUE FAULT ................................................ 40, 86
high rod load state ...........................................................97
gear crank troubleshooter ............................................... 60
high rod load strokes .......................................................97
gear ratio......................................................... 59, 152, 160
high rod load violations....................................................97
Gear/Crank Menu ........................................................... 59
high speed fault .........................................................95, 99
gearbox efficiency ............................................. 59, 79, 161
high speed fault time .......................................................99
gearbox friction ............................................................... 59
high speed mask .....................................................99, 175
gearbox load factor ................................................... 59, 79
high speed restart delay ..................................................99
gearbox rated torque....................................................... 59
high torq fault.............................................................95, 99
GEN FAULT.............................................................. 40, 86
high torq fault time...........................................................99
gen run fault .................................................................. 175
high torq mask .........................................................99, 173
GEN START ............................................................. 40, 86
high torq restart delay......................................................99
General Information
Index
182
HS thermal switch fault ................................................. 166
load cell max volts .........................................................132
I/O Utility ......................................................................... 35
load cell min ..................................................................132
identification error fault............................................ 34, 170
load cell min volts ..........................................................132
Imperial Units .................................................................. 39
load cell source .............................................................132
INCH FWD ................................................................ 40, 86
load cell value................................................................132
INCH REV................................................................. 40, 86
load fbk loss fault...........................................................168
inch speed....................................................................... 51
load marker fault............................................................168
Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR)..................... 14, 73
load pg loss a fault ........................................................167
input avg power monitor.................................................. 82
load pg loss b fault ........................................................167
input power meter ..................................................... 43, 82
load pg loss m fault .......................................................167
intake prs fault............................................................... 172
Load Resistor ..................................................................22
intake prs fault time....................................................... 123
load runaway fault .........................................................169
intake prs max............................................................... 122
lockout status ..................................................38, 100, 173
intake prs max fault....................................................... 123
lockout time .............................................................38, 173
intake prs max volts ...................................................... 122
Logic Common ..............................................21, 22, 23, 24
intake prs max warning ................................................. 123
low prs flow delay ..........................................................141
intake prs min................................................................ 122
low prs flow fault ............................................................171
intake prs min fault........................................................ 123
low prs flow input ...........................................................141
intake prs min volts ....................................................... 122
low prs flow restart delay...............................................141
intake prs restart delay.................................................. 123
low prs flow time ............................................................141
intake prs rtu word ........................................................ 122
low pump load fault .........................................................98
intake prs source........................................... 122, 123, 172
low pump load mask................................................98, 175
intake prs value..................................................... 122, 172
low pump load restart delay ............................................98
inverter rms fault ........................................................... 169
low pump load start .........................................................98
IPR Chart ........................................................................ 37
low pump load state ........................................................98
IPR Curve Graph ...................................................... 14, 73
low pump load strokes.....................................................98
IPR flow monitor.............................................................. 73
low pump load violations .................................................98
IPR max flow perf............................................................ 73
low rod load fault .......................................................95, 96
IPR max flow pump......................................................... 73
low rod load mask .............................................96, 97, 173
IPR pressure monitor ...................................................... 73
low rod load restart delay ................................................96
ireg shutoff fault ............................................................ 166
low rod load start .............................................................96
jerk time ........................................................................ 104
low rod load state ............................................................96
Keypad................................................................ 25, 26, 29
low rod load strokes ........................................................96
keypad down spm ........................................... 51, 112, 155
low rod load violations .....................................................96
keypad pos units ........................................................... 143
low rod span mask ........................................................175
keypad units............................................................ 39, 143
low speed fault ..........................................................95, 99
keypad up spm................................................ 50, 111, 155
low speed fault time.........................................................99
keypad vel units ............................................................ 143
low speed mask.......................................................99, 173
LCD Display ............................................................ 25, 144
low speed restart delay ...................................................99
LCD Display Menu Navigation .................................. 27, 29
low voltage supply fault .................................................166
leakage Sigma Ls ......................................................... 104
lrp maintenance .........................................................43, 48
level 1 password 38, 40, 44, 46, 48, 49, 50, 53, 55, 88, 90,
95, 143
lrp status ..................................................................65, 157
level 2 password ...... 38, 59, 61, 67, 73, 74, 77, 81, 82, 85,
101, 103, 111, 134, 139, 146, 152
level 3 password ............................................. 38, 106, 158
lift avg power monitor...................................................... 82
lift efficiency .................................................................... 82
linear lead ............................................................... 61, 152
Linear Rod Pump ...................................................... 40, 41
liquid fill monitor ........................................ 42, 53, 173, 176
Lm squared over Lr....................................................... 104
load cell max ................................................................. 132
LRP System ...........................................................40, 41

maint gearbox count........................................................48
maint gearbox lube..........................................................48
maint rack count ..............................................................48
maint rack lube ................................................................48
maint stuff box .................................................................48
maint stuff count ..............................................................48
Maintenance Menu..........................................................48
maintenance reset...........................................................48
maintenance standing valve............................................48
maintenance traveling valve............................................48
General Information
Index
183
Mapping Data Items........................................................ 36
modulation index ...........................................................107
Masks........................................................................ 30, 31
modulation select ......................... 103, 107, 108, 109, 110
Mass Data Storage Module ...................................... 13, 79
modulation state ............................................................107
MAX FAULT.............................................................. 40, 86
month end .......................................................................88
max fault event.............................................................. 173
month start ......................................................................88
max gearbox torq .......................................................... 175
motor avg power monitor.................................................82
MAX GEARBOX TORQ .................................................. 41
motor blower off fault.....................................................171
MAX GEARBOX TORQ Menu ...................................... 157
motor current .................................................................103
max pos err err................................................................ 65
motor fbk invert..............................................................107
max possible spm ................................... 50, 101, 104, 155
motor fbk size ................................................103, 107, 159
max rod load ................................................................... 66
motor feedback loss fault ..............................................168
Max Stream Module........................................................ 13
motor inertia ..........................................................101, 104
max top rod stress .......................................................... 71
motor leads....................................................103, 107, 154
max vel err err................................................................. 65
motor marker fault .........................................................168
maximum current .................................. 101, 103, 152, 169
motor max gearbox torq ..........................................59, 102
maximum rod load .................................................... 43, 71
motor max gearbox torque ............................................105
maximum rod load .......................................................... 97
motor max lift .................................................................102
MaxStream Module ..................................................... 19
motor max power...........................................102, 104, 160
meas cntrweight value .................................................... 63
motor max rpm ... 74, 75, 99, 101, 104, 152, 154, 159, 160
meas plunger clearance............................................ 47, 68
motor max torque ..........................................102, 104, 153
meas ref position............................................................. 63
motor max torque inlb............................................102, 105
memory ............................................................. 32, 33, 169
Motor Menu ...................................................................101
Menu Navigation ................................................. 26, 28, 29
MOTOR OFF .............................................................40, 86
menu visibility..... 13, 30, 39, 43, 45, 47, 48, 49, 52, 58, 60,
66, 72, 73, 76, 80, 81, 84, 87, 89, 94, 100, 105, 106,
107, 108, 109, 110, 124, 126, 127, 128, 130, 131, 132,
133, 138, 142, 143, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151,
157, 159, 162
motor peak power monitor...............................................82
Menus ............................................................................. 39
motor power limit lrp ........................................................83
Metric Units ..................................................................... 39
motor rated current........................................................101
min bus voltage................................................. 66, 83, 155
motor rated frequency ...................................................101
min gearbox torq ........................................................... 175
motor rated voltage .......................................................101
MIN GEARBOX TORQ ..................................... 41, 65, 157
motor reference loss........................................................65
min rod load .................................................................... 65
motor rms ewarn fault....................................................170
minimum pump fill ........................................................... 49
motor rms limit ...............................................101, 103, 168
minimum rod load ............................................... 43, 54, 71
motor rms limit fault .......................................................168
minimum rod load ........................................................... 97
motor rpm ......................................................................102
Minus Sign Key ............................................................... 26
motor rtd power .............................................................101
modbus comm error event ............................................ 175
motor rtd torque .....................................................102, 104
Modbus Master Protocol 19, 114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 121,
122, 124, 125, 126, 128, 129, 130, 131, 150, 151
motor runaway fault.......................................................168
Modbus RTU................................................................... 19
motor thermal switch fault .............................................171
modbus rtu poll rate ...................................................... 150

modbus rtu read count .................................................. 151
motor tuning (AC Test Utility) 30, 101, 102, 103, 105, 152,
153, 159, 160, 163
modbus rtu retries ......................................................... 150
motorrms limit ................................................................152
modbus rtu status ......................................................... 151
negative torq fault................................................95, 98, 99
modbus rtu timeout ....................................................... 150
negative torq fault time ....................................................98
modbus rtu value 1 ....................................................... 150
negative torq mask ..................................................98, 173
modbus rtu value 2 ....................................................... 150
negative torq restart delay ...............................................98
modbus rtu value 3 ....................................................... 151
Network Map ...................................................................36
modbus rtu word 1 ........................................................ 150
NO INFLOW ..................................................................162
modbus rtu word 2 ........................................................ 150
non volatile mem fault ...................................................169
modbus rtu word 3 ........................................................ 151
non-volatile memory ..........................................32, 33, 169
modbus status............................................................... 175
Number Keys...................................................................26
motor pg loss a fault ......................................................166

motor pg loss b fault ......................................................166
motor pg loss m fault .....................................................167
motor thermal RMS ...............................................102, 103
General Information
Index
184
numeric parameters ........................................................ 30
park direction ...................................................................61
NVMEM............................................................. 32, 33, 169
PARKED....................................................................40, 86
obsync data error fault .................................................. 170
PARKING ........................................................................40
obsync receive fault ...................................................... 170
password event .............................................................173
oil flow monitor ................................................................ 42
Password Protection ...................................37, 38, 39, 173
oil gravity................................................................... 69, 73
pe collision fault.............................................................175
oil production meter ........................................................ 43
peak down torque............................................................59
Operational Modes.......................................................... 15
peak up torque ................................................................59
Operator Interface........................................................... 25
Phase Loss Detection ...........................................110, 171
Operator Menu................................................................ 40
phys counterweight value..............................................161
opt id log time.................................................................. 58
phys gearbox efficiency.................................................161
opt id max spm................................................................ 57
phys rod friction .............................................................161
opt id max test................................................................. 57
phys rotary inertia..........................................................161
opt id min spm................................................................. 57
physical simulate ...................................................158, 161
opt id req spm ................................................................. 57
Pin-Outs ..........................................................................20
opt id time ....................................................................... 58
PIO Utility ........................................................................35
opt id timer ...................................................................... 58
pl filtered current............................................................110
optimize cycle mode ....................................................... 56
pl rip current ..................................................................110
Optimize Shut Off................................................ 40, 56, 86
pl trip current .................................................................110
optimize state.................................................. 55, 173, 174
plunger clearance ................................................42, 47, 68
optimizer ......................................................................... 49
plunger diameter .......................................................67, 72
Optimizer......................................................................... 16
plunger leakage .........................................................42, 68
optimizer id data event.................................................. 176
plunger length............................................................67, 72
optimizer id enable............................................ 57, 58, 176
POC Controller ................... 16, 40, 44, 45, 56, 81, 86, 173
Optimizer Menu....................................................... 55, 176
POC off time ..................................................................173
optimz cycle .................................................................. 175
Port A...................................................................20, 36, 37
optimz cycle fill................................................................ 56
Port A Units .....................................................................39
optimz cycle mode .......................................................... 56
Port B...............................................................................20
optimz cycle time ............................................................ 56
Port B Units .....................................................................39
optimz down boost .......................................................... 56
porta address ................................................................147
optimz ki.......................................................................... 55
porta baud rate ..............................................................147
optimz kp......................................................................... 56
porta checksum .............................................................147
optimz max fill ................................................................. 55
porta parity ....................................................................147
optimz max shutoff.......................................................... 56
porta pos units ...............................................................147
optimz min shutoff........................................................... 56
porta protocol ....................... 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151
optimz shutoff delay ........................................................ 56
porta rtu gap ..................................................................147
optimz shutoff fill ............................................................. 56
porta stop bits ................................................................147
optimz start spm.............................................................. 55
porta term size...............................................................147
optimz target fill............................................................... 55
porta term type ..............................................................146
optomux timeout fault.................................................... 169
porta units................................................................39, 147
output avg power monitor ............................................... 82
porta vel units ................................................................147
output phase loss fault .................................................. 170
portb address ................................................................147
overrun fault .................................................................. 168
portb baud rate ..............................................................148
overspeed trip fault ....................................................... 169
portb checksum .............................................................148
Parallel I/O .............................................................. 21, 139
portb parity ....................................................................148
Parallel Inputs ................................................... 21, 35, 139
portb pos units ...............................................................148
Parallel Outputs ................................................ 21, 35, 142
portb protocol ............................... 147, 148, 149, 150, 151
Parameter Entry.............................................................. 26
portb rtu gap ..................................................................148
Parameter Unit Selection ................................................ 13
portb stop bits ................................................................148
Parameter Visibility .. 29, 39, 49, 52, 60, 73, 76, 80, 81, 84,
87, 89, 94, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 105, 138, 142, 144, 145
portb term size...............................................................147
parameters...................................................................... 29
portb units................................................................39, 148
Parameters ..................................................................... 39
portb vel units ................................................................148
portb term type ..............................................................147
General Information
Index
185
pos error........................................................................ 168
Pump Speed Menu..........................................................50
pos error ewarn fault ..................................................... 170
Pump Speed Optimizer ...................................................16
position error ................................................................... 65
pump speed source...................................................41, 50
POSITION ERROR....................... 41, 62, 65, 95, 157, 174
pump speeed troubleshooter...........................................51
POSITION FAULT .............. 40, 41, 62, 65, 86, 95, 96, 174
pump spm monitor.......................................42, 50, 57, 162
power limiting lrp ............................................................. 83
pump stroke counter........................................................43
POWER LOSS.................................................. 41, 65, 157
pump stroke inferred .......................................................54
power loss bus level........................................ 83, 152, 155
Pump Velocity Chart........................................................37
power loss bus tol ................................................... 83, 156
Pumping Unit Menu.........................................................61
power loss control ................................................... 66, 175
Quickstart Menu ............................................................152
power loss parked......................................................... 175
Quit Key...........................................................................26
power loss speed ...................................................... 51, 83
Recalling Parameter Values ............................................33
Power Menu.................................................................... 82
Receive ...........................................................................37
power off date ............................................................... 173
ref adjust........................................................................173
power off time ............................................................... 173
ref adjust mask ..............................................................174
power troubleshooter ...................................................... 84
ref event count.................................................................63
power up event ..................................................... 166, 173
REF FAULT .........................................................40, 65, 86
Power Usage .......................................... 43, 44, 45, 82, 83
ref input count..................................................................63
Power, Phase Loss Detection............................... 110, 171
REF INPUT LOSS .....................................................65, 86
Power-Up Display ........................................................... 28
ref input polarity .......................................................62, 155
powerup restart delay ......................................... 40, 86, 95
REF LOSS.......................................................................65
Power-up Restarts .............................................. 40, 86, 95
ref position down .......................................................63, 75
pressure units ......................................................... 39, 143
ref position up ............................................................63, 75
Protocol........................................................................... 19
ref window tol ..................................................................63
pstandby event.............................................................. 173
reference advance...........................................................63
Pull-up Resistors............................................................. 19
reference filter .................................................................63
pump average spm ................................... 29, 41, 173, 176
reference input ..........................................................63, 65
pump avg spm monitor ................................................... 57
reference loss warning ..................................................173
pump avg spm monitorr .................................................. 50
regen avg power monitor.................................................82
pump bottom spacing................................................ 68, 78
remote event .................................................................174
pump class.......................................................... 68, 69, 79
remote fault reset ....................................................41, 156
pump depth ......................................................... 42, 67, 72
Remote Keypad Protocol ................................................19
pump differential pressure .............................................. 67
Remote Operation .......................................40, 41, 86, 156
pump direction .......................................................... 59, 65
remote run enable .............................. 40, 41, 86, 156, 174
pump discharge pressure ....................................... 67, 124
REMOTE STOP ................................................40, 86, 174
pump dwell position ........................................................ 49
request spm...............................................................51, 57
pump dwell time ........................................................ 40, 86
request spm down ...........................................................51
pump dwell timer............................................................. 49
request spm up................................................................51
pump efficiency ............................................................... 68
Reservoir Menu ...............................................................73
Pump Fill Menu ............................................................... 53
Reservoir Model ........................................................14, 73
pump fill monitor........................ 14, 29, 42, 53, 54, 55, 173
RESERVOIR OFF .........................................................162
pump fill offset................................................................. 53
reservoir pressure .....................................................14, 73
pump flow monitor........................................................... 14
reset all meters ..........................................................42, 43
pump intake pressure ............................... 67, 73, 122, 159
Reset Fault ....................................................26, 29, 34, 49
Pump Load.......................................................... 43, 79, 98
reset power meter ...........................................................82
pump load monitor .......................... 43, 54, 71, 79, 98, 175
Resistor .....................................................................19, 22
PUMP OFF ................................................................... 162
restart attempts ... 40, 49, 86, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 113, 115,
116, 118, 119, 120, 122, 123, 124, 126, 127, 128, 130,
131, 132, 139, 140, 141, 142, 173
Pump Off Controller (POC) ................... 15, 16, 40, 86, 173
PUMP OFF WAIT ..................................................... 40, 86
PUMP OFF WITH GAS................................................. 162
pump rate adjust ............................................................. 70
pump size........................................................................ 67
Pump Speed Chart ......................................................... 37
restart counter .................................................................95

RESTART DELAY.....................................................40, 86
restart min delay ..............................................................95
restart time ......................................................................95
General Information
Index
186
restart timer................................................... 40, 56, 86, 95
run enable input.........................................................40, 86
Restoring Parameters ..................................................... 33
run req vel .......................................................................65
revision number ...................................................... 43, 103
run verify time ..................................................................95
RJ-45 Connectors ........................................................... 20
running status ................................. 29, 40, 41, 65, 86, 157
rod 1 diameter................................................................. 68
S rod stroke ...............................................................61, 75
rod 1 length ..................................................................... 68
Safety Information .............................................................7
rod 1 type .................................................................. 68, 69
sampler dynacard samples .............................................79
rod 2 diameter................................................................. 68
scissors..............................................................................9
rod 2 length ..................................................................... 68
Screen Saver.....................................................13, 28, 145
rod 3 diameter................................................................. 69
screen saver delay ..................................................28, 145
rod 3 length ..................................................................... 69
screen saver safety ...........................................13, 28, 145
rod 3 type ........................................................................ 68
SDO default event .........................................................174
rod 4 diameter................................................................. 69
SDO dual event .............................................................174
rod 4 length ..................................................................... 69
SDO optimize event ......................................................174
rod 4 type ........................................................................ 69
SDO single event ..........................................................174
rod 5 diameter................................................................. 69
SD-RAM ....................................................................13, 79
rod 5 length ..................................................................... 69
Security Clearance, password protection................37, 173
rod 5 type ........................................................................ 69
Sensor .............................................................67, 114, 117
rod avg power monitor .................................................... 82
Sensor Menu ............................................ 22, 23, 171, 172
rod damping gain ............................................................ 77
Sensor-Free Control ......................................14, 15, 16, 49
Rod Float Controller.................................................. 16, 81
Sensors .......................................... 13, 135, 136, 137, 138
rod frctn contrast ............................................... 70, 78, 156
Serial Communication ........ 9, 15, 19, 20, 36, 37, 146, 147
rod friction ........................................... 70, 75, 78, 156, 160
Serial Communication Connection ..................................20
rod length .................................................................. 69, 72
Serial Communication Pin-Outs ......................................20
Rod Load ........................................................................ 43
Serial Communication Troubleshooting ..........................36
rod load monitor ................................................ 54, 64, 174
Serial Operation ......................................................41, 156
rod load span .......................................................... 97, 175
Serial Protocols ...............................................................19
rod load span fault .......................................................... 97
Set Event Masks ............................ 26, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100
rod load span mask......................................................... 97
Set Fault Masks.............................. 26, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100
rod load span restart delay ............................................. 97
Set Warning Masks ........................ 26, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100
rod load span start .......................................................... 97
settle time ......................................................................104
rod load span state ......................................................... 97
Setup Menu .....................................................................29
rod load span strokes...................................................... 97
sfw faults 1 ............................................................173, 174
rod load span violations .................................................. 97
sfw faults 2 ............................................................173, 174
rod mass gain ................................................................. 77
sfw faults 3 ....................................................................174
rod position monitor ........................................................ 64
Signals In Menu.............................................................111
Rod Pump Menu ............................................................. 67
Signals Out ....................................................................134
rod pump troubleshooter................................................. 72
sim calc system gain .....................................................160
rod sections..................................................................... 68
sim drive motor max power ...........................................160
Rod Speed Chart ............................................................ 37
sim drive motor max torque ...........................................160
rod stiffness gain............................................................. 77
sim drive rated power ....................................................159
rod stress ........................................................................ 71
sim drive rating ..............................................................159
Rod Velocity Chart .......................................................... 37
sim gas oil ratio .............................................................161
rod velocity monitor................................................... 51, 65
sim gas separation eff ...................................................162
rod weight buoyant.................................................... 54, 70
sim liquid fill ...................................................................159
rod weight in air............................................................... 70
sim Reservoir State .......................................................162
rod weight offset.............................................................. 69
sim standing valve Cv ...................................................161
Rod/Pump Model ...................................................... 77, 78
sim well inflow rate ........................................................162
rotary inertia ........................................ 64, 75, 79, 155, 161
simulate drive ....................................... 106, 107, 158, 159
RTC takeoverfault ......................................................... 169
simulate drive load ........................................................158
RTU Master Protocol ... 114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 121, 122,
124, 125, 126, 128, 129, 130, 131, 150, 151
Simulate Menu ..............................................................158
Run Enable ............................................................. 21, 174
simulate ref input ...........................................................158
simulate mode .............................. 158, 159, 160, 161, 162
General Information
Index
187
simulate troubleshooter................................................. 162
structural imbalance ................................................63, 152
simulated fluid over pump ............................................. 159
stuff box friction ...............................................70, 156, 161
Single Speed Mode......................................................... 15
Stuffing Box Friction ........................................70, 156, 161
slip frequency........................................................ 101, 104
surface filter .....................................................................77
slippage, fluid ................................................ 42, 44, 45, 68
sv check rod load 1 .........................................................47
snug air compensation.................................................... 62
sv check rod load 2 .........................................................47
snug auto initiate............................................................. 62
sv check rod pos 1 ..........................................................47
snug auto max gearbox torq ..................................... 62, 95
sv check rod pos 2 ..........................................................47
snug auto min gearbox torq ...................................... 62, 95
sv leak rate ................................................................47, 48
snug auto pos error............................................. 62, 75, 95
sv load change ................................................................47
snug auto vel error .............................................. 62, 75, 96
switch freq mode ...........................................................107
snug direction.................................................................. 61
switch frequency....................................................103, 107
snug fault ...................................................................... 175
sync data error fault.......................................................169
SNUG FAULT ..................................................... 40, 65, 86
sync receive fault...........................................................169
snug position................................................................... 61
synchronous motor ................................................101, 103
snug tolerance ................................................................ 62
System Controllers ..........................................................16
snug torque limit................................................ 62, 74, 154
system gain ...........................................................104, 160
soft landing................................................................ 55, 56
System ID Test ......................................................104, 160
software number ..................................................... 43, 103
System Monitor Utility, UEdit ........................................14
solar enable .................................................................... 83
System Monitors..............................................................14
solar power request ........................................................ 84
system order..................................................................104
solar sim power............................................................... 83
system tuning ........................................................104, 160
solar state ....................................................................... 84
system wn .............................................................104, 160
solar volt error ................................................................. 83
temp 1 fault....................................................................172
solar volt ki ...................................................................... 83
temp 1 fault time ............................................................129
solar volt kp..................................................................... 84
temp 1 max....................................................................129
solar volt setpoint ............................................................ 83
temp 1 max fault ............................................................129
Speed Chart.................................................................... 37
temp 1 max volts ...........................................................129
speed mode select.................................... 15, 50, 155, 173
temp 1 max warning ......................................................129
speed SDO select ........................................................... 50
temp 1 min.....................................................................128
SRP Gauge Display ................................................ 29, 173
temp 1 min fault .............................................................129
SRP Main Display ..................................................... 28, 29
temp 1 min volts ............................................................129
srp main state ................................................................. 65
temp 1 restart delay.......................................................130
srp motor vel rpm ............................................................ 51
temp 1 rtu word .............................................................129
SRP Quick Data Entry .................................................... 29
temp 1 source....................................... 128, 129, 130, 172
srp sub state ..................................................... 65, 74, 154
temp 1 value ..........................................................129, 172
srp troubleshooter .... 13, 43, 45, 47, 48, 49, 51, 54, 58, 60,
66, 72, 73, 76, 79, 81, 84, 87, 89, 94, 100, 105, 110,
133, 138, 142, 145, 151, 157, 162
temp 2 fault....................................................................172
ssi receive fault ............................................................. 169

standby sts................................................................ 40, 86
Standing Valve Check......................................... 46, 47, 48
start event ..................................................................... 173
starting fault delay........................................................... 95
static reservoir pressure.................................................. 73
Statistics.................................................................. 29, 173
stator resistance Rs ...................................................... 104
stop event ..................................................................... 173
Storing Parameter Values............................................... 33
stroke id enable....................................................... 74, 154
stroke id length.......................................... 61, 74, 156, 160
Stroke Id Test.......................................................... 74, 160
stroke id torque limit.......................................... 62, 74, 154
temp 2 fault time ............................................................131

temp 2 max....................................................................130
temp 2 max fault ............................................................130
temp 2 max volts ...........................................................130
temp 2 max warning ......................................................130
temp 2 min.....................................................................130
temp 2 min fault .............................................................130
temp 2 min volts ............................................................130
temp 2 restart delay.......................................................131
temp 2 rtu word .............................................................130
temp 2 source................................................130, 131, 172
temp 2 value ..........................................................130, 172
Terminal Block (TB1)...................... 21, 139, 140, 141, 142
Terminal Block (TB2)..... 21, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117,
118, 119, 121, 122, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 130,
131, 153, 154
General Information
Index
188
Terminal Block Location.................................................. 18
tubing temp max volts ...................................................118
Terminating Resistors ..................................................... 19
tubing temp max warning ..............................................119
thermal protection ......................................................... 107
tubing temp min .............................................................118
thermal switch ewarn fault ............................................ 170
tubing temp min fault .....................................................119
time of use limit ................................. 16, 40, 49, 86, 88, 89
tubing temp min volts ....................................................118
Time, setting of ................................................... 36, 88, 89
tubing temp restart delay ...............................................119
timed event 1 event....................................................... 173
tubing temp rtu word......................................................118
timed event 1 mask............................................... 100, 173
tubing temp source........................................118, 119, 172
timed event 1 select ...................................................... 100
tubing temp value ............................................92, 118, 172
timed event 1 strokes.................................................... 100
tv check rod load 1 ..........................................................46
timed event 1 time......................................................... 100
tv check rod load 2 ..........................................................46
Timer Controller ............................................ 16, 40, 86, 89
tv check rod pos 1 ...........................................................46
timer mode .............................................. 16, 40, 49, 86, 89
tv check rod pos 2 ...........................................................46
timer mode restart........................................................... 89
tv leak rate .................................................................47, 48
timer off time ....................................................... 40, 86, 89
tv load change .................................................................47
timer off timer .................................................................. 89
UCR files, Chart Recorder Utility, UEdit .......................14
timer on time ................................................................... 89
UDH files, Data Sampler History, UEdit........................14
timer on timer .................................................................. 89
UDM files, Data Sampler Manager, UEdit ........14, 15, 79
timer poc ......................................................................... 49
UDT files, Application Project File, UEdit......................14
TIMER WAIT............................................................. 40, 86
UEdit fault ......................................................................169
torq reg select ....................................................... 108, 109
UEdit ........................................ 13, 14, 30, 33, 34, 37, 90
Torque Chart................................................................... 37
UEdit Utility ...................................................................37
torque invert .......................................................... 103, 154
unit rated torque ..............................................................59
torque limit ............................................................ 103, 153
unit rtd rod load .......................................................61, 152
torque reg error fault ..................................................... 169
unit rtd stroke...........................................................61, 152
Torque Regulator .......................................................... 169
unit rtd torque ..........................................................61, 152
transducerless feedback ......................... 35, 106, 107, 159
Unit Selection ..................................................................13
Transmit .......................................................................... 37
Units ................................................................................39
Traveling Valve Check ........................................ 46, 47, 48
Units, console port...........................................................39
Troubleshooter................................................................ 13
Units, keypad...................................................................39
tubing anchor depth ........................................................ 67
Units, port A.....................................................................39
tubing outer diameter ................................................ 67, 72
Units, port B.....................................................................39
tubing pressure ............................................... 67, 114, 117
Units, UEdit Software....................................................39
tubing pressure source ................................................... 67
Units, user .......................................................................39
tubing prs fault .............................................................. 172
unknown fbk module fault..............................................169
tubing prs fault time....................................................... 118
Up Down Key ..................................................................26
tubing prs max ...................................................... 114, 117
up maximum spm ........................................46, 50, 57, 155
tubing prs max fault............................................... 114, 117
up minimum spm .......................................................50, 57
tubing prs max volts .............................................. 114, 117
up position .........................................................61, 74, 156
tubing prs max warning................................................. 117
up speed source ......................................................50, 111
tubing prs min ....................................................... 114, 116
upid load source ............................................103, 106, 159
tubing prs min fault................................................ 115, 117
upid motor source..........................................103, 106, 159
tubing prs min volts ............................................... 114, 117
upid multiple ............................................................35, 106
tubing prs restart delay ................................................. 118
UPLOAD..........................................................................32
tubing prs rtu word ................................................ 114, 117
Upload WPR..............................................................15, 34
tubing prs source .................. 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 172
user 1 fault.....................................................................171
tubing prs value....................................... 91, 114, 117, 172
user 1 fault input ............................................................140
tubing stretch ............................................................ 54, 71
user 1 fault restart delay ................................................140
tubing stretch loss ........................................................... 71
user 1 fault time .............................................................140
tubing temp fault ........................................................... 172
user 2 fault.....................................................................171
tubing temp fault time.................................................... 119
user 2 fault input ............................................................140
tubing temp max ........................................................... 118
user 2 fault restart delay ................................................140
tubing temp max fault.................................................... 118
user 2 fault time .............................................................140
General Information
Index
189
user 3 fault .................................................................... 171
user display 1 nsize .......................................................143
user 3 fault input ........................................................... 141
user display 1 usize .......................................................143
user 3 fault restart delay ............................................... 141
user display 1 vsize .......................................................143
user 3 fault time ............................................................ 141
user display 2 col...........................................................143
user 4 fault .................................................................... 171
user display 2 item ..................................................29, 143
user 4 fault input ........................................................... 141
user 4 fault restart delay ............................................... 141
user 4 fault time ............................................................ 141
user A fault.................................................................... 172
user A fault time ............................................................ 126
user A max.................................................................... 125
user A max fault ............................................................ 125
user A max volts ........................................................... 125
user display 4 col...........................................................144
user A max warning ...................................................... 125
user A min..................................................................... 125
user A min fault ............................................................. 125
user A min volts ............................................................ 125
user A restart delay....................................................... 126
user faults 0 ...........................................................173, 174
user A rtu word.............................................................. 125
user faults 1 ...........................................................173, 174
user A source........................................ 124, 125, 126, 172
User Speed Controller.....................................................16
user A units ................................................................... 125
user spm adj source ........................................................16
user A value .......................................................... 125, 172
USM files, System Monitor, UEdit.................................14
user B fault.................................................................... 172
valve check auto..............................................................46
user B fault time ............................................................ 127
valve check date..............................................................47
user B max.................................................................... 126
valve check dwell spm.....................................................46
user B max fault ............................................................ 127
valve check enable ..........................................................46
user B max volts ........................................................... 126
Valve Check Menu ..........................................................46
user B max warning ...................................................... 127
valve check run spm........................................................46
user B min..................................................................... 126
valve check state.............................................................47
user B min fault ............................................................. 127
valve check sv dwell rod pos ...........................................46
user B min volts ............................................................ 126
valve check sv dwell time ................................................46
user B restart delay....................................................... 127
Valve Check Test ......................................................14, 68
user B rtu word.............................................................. 126
valve check time ..............................................................47
user B source................................................ 126, 127, 172
valve check troubleshooter..............................................47
user B units ................................................................... 126
valve check tv dwell time.................................................46
user B value .......................................................... 126, 172
valve check tv rod pos .....................................................46
user C fault.................................................................... 172
vector source ........................................ 101, 103, 106, 159
user C fault time............................................................ 128
Velocity Chart ..................................................................37
user C max.................................................................... 127
VELOCITY ERROR...................... 41, 62, 65, 96, 157, 174
user C max fault............................................................ 128
viscous frctn gain.............................................................77
user C max volts ........................................................... 127
visibility ............................................................................39
user C max warning ...................................................... 128
visibility control ............................................13, 30, 39, 144
user C min..................................................................... 127
Visibility Control ...............................................................39
user C min fault............................................................. 128
volume units ............................................................39, 143
user C min volts ............................................................ 127
Warning Conditions, viewing .........................................165
user C restart delay....................................................... 128
Warning Masks 30, 31, 113, 115, 116, 118, 119, 120, 122,
123, 124, 126, 127, 128, 129, 131, 132, 164
user C rtu word ............................................................. 128

user C source................................................ 127, 128, 172
user C units................................................................... 127
user C value.......................................................... 128, 172
User Defined Display ...................................................... 29
User Display.................................................................... 13
user display 1 item .................................................. 29, 143
Warning Masks, auto... 113, 115, 116, 118, 119, 120, 122,
123, 124, 126, 127, 128, 129, 131, 132
Warning Masks, clear......................................................26
Warning Masks, set........................ 26, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100
Warning Masks, viewing................................................165
watchdog timer fault ......................................................166
General Information
Index
190
water cut ................................................................... 69, 73
WELL ID RUN ...........................................................40, 86
water cut fault time........................................................ 132
well id speed....................................................................74
water cut max................................................................ 131
well id state..............................................................74, 154
water cut max fault........................................................ 131
well id status ............................................................74, 154
water cut max volts ....................................................... 131
Well ID Test .. 14, 40, 41, 74, 75, 76, 78, 86, 104, 160, 176
water cut max warning .................................................. 132
well id time.......................................................................76
water cut min................................................................. 131
well id troubleshooter ......................................................76
water cut min fault......................................................... 132
Well Production Report .......................................15, 34, 79
water cut min volts ........................................................ 131
well test flow ....................................................................73
water cut restart delay................................................... 132
well test pressure ............................................................73
water cut rtu word ......................................................... 131
wi balance action .............................................................75
water cut source.................................................... 131, 132
Wiring ..............................................................................17
water cut value.............................................................. 131
Wiring Standards .............................................................17
water production meter ................................................... 43
WPR ....................................................................15, 34, 79
water specific gravity................................................. 70, 73
Xless (transducerless).....................................................35
weekday and weekend operation ................. 16, 40, 86, 88
zenith address ...............................................................149
weekday end time ........................................................... 89
zenith comm error event................................................175
weekday start time .......................................................... 88
zenith comm fault ..........................................................149
weekend end time........................................................... 89
zenith error timer ...........................................................149
weekend start time.......................................................... 89
zenith poll rate ...............................................................149
well id date ...................................................................... 76
Zenith Protocol ................................................................19
well id enable .......................................................... 74, 154
zenith read count ...........................................................150
well id event .................................................................. 176
zenith retries ..................................................................149
Well ID Menu .................................................................. 74
zenith status ..........................................................149, 175
well id number................................................................. 74
zenith timeout ................................................................149
General Information
Index
191
General Information
Index
192

2) General Manual LRP210

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2) General Manual LRP210

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

805-661.

LRP General Manual

Unico LRP General Manual

About the Manual ............................................................................................................ 10

Application Overview ..................................................................................................... 12

Application Wiring .......................................................................................................... 17

Unico LRP General Manual

Analog Output Connection TB2 .......................................................................................................22

Operator Interface ........................................................................................................... 25

Unico LRP General Manual

Application Dictionary Menus ....................................................................................... 39

System Startup.............................................................................................................. 163

Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 163

Faults, Warnings and Events....................................................................................... 164

Unico LRP General Manual

Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 164

Unico LRP General Manual

Attention Symbol Definition

Unico LRP General Manual

Avoid contact with the liquid

Avoid inhaling the vapors and ventilate the area

If electrolyte is ingested, dilute it by drinking warm water and seek immediate

Unico LRP General Manual

Safe Service Practices

Follow industry-recognized safety practices, including, but not limited to:

Use only one hand to hold test equipment probes

Stand on insulated material

Use an isolated oscilloscope

Keep unnecessary personnel out of the work area

Never leave a drive enclosure open or unattended

Never run with scissors

Unico LRP General Manual

About the Manual

Parameter descriptions on a menu-by-menu basis.

Digital, analog, and serial I/O descriptions.

Faults, Warnings and Events.

What is not covered

Receiving and unpacking instructions

Hardware features and specifications

Mechanical installation instructions

Electrical installation instructions

Drive troubleshooting, maintenance and spare parts

Detailed listing of basic drive parameters

Drive Setup and auto-tuning procedures

Application setup and auto-tuning procedures

Interface setup and diagnostic utilities

Unico LRP General Manual

Unico LRP General Manual

Unico LRP General Manual

100 MHz (X10PN 323-546, 323-547, 323-397)

Compact 100 MHz (X10PN 323-656, 323-060, 323-667)

Analog Interface 8 Inputs, 4 Outputs Module (PN 321-557)

MaxStream 900 MHz RF Wireless Module (PN 924-185)

MaxStream 2.4 GHz RF Wireless Module (PN 924-186)

Bluetooth Communication Module (PN 712-334, 713-335)

16-key keypad 2x24 line Display Screen (PN 203-046)

16-key keypad 16x40 line Graphic Screen (PN 203-181)

16-key keypad and operator display.

An embedded parameter troubleshooter to assist in avoiding parameter entry errors.

Imperial or Metric parameter unit display.

User selectable volume, flow and pressure units.

A four-parameter user definable main screen display area.

Unico LRP General Manual

Dynamometer, Torque, Speed and IPR Graphs